Ford - Fusion - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017

2017 FUSION Owner’s Manual 2017 FUSION Owner’s Manual owner.ford.com ford.ca March 2016 First Printing Owner’s Manual Fusion Litho in U.S.A. HE5J 19A321 AA The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2016 All rights reserved. Part Number: 20160205213240 Table of Contents Supplementary Restraints System Introduction About This Manual...........................................7 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Data Recording..................................................9 California Proposition 65..............................11 Perchlorate.........................................................11 Ford Credit..........................................................11 Replacement Parts Recommendation.......................................12 Special Notices................................................12 Mobile Communications Equipment.....................................................13 Export Unique Options..................................13 Principle of Operation..................................39 Driver and Passenger Airbags...................40 Front Passenger Sensing System.............41 Side Airbags.....................................................43 Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........44 Safety Canopy™............................................44 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......46 Airbag Disposal...............................................47 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio Frequencies.................................................48 Remote Control..............................................48 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control...........................................................53 Environment Protecting the Environment........................15 Child Safety MyKey™ General Information.......................................16 Installing Child Restraints.............................17 Booster Seats..................................................25 Child Restraint Positioning..........................27 Child Safety Locks.........................................28 Principle of Operation..................................54 Creating a MyKey............................................55 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56 Checking MyKey System Status...............56 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems.........................................................57 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................57 Seatbelts Principle of Operation..................................30 Fastening the Seatbelts................................31 Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................34 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime.............................................................35 Seatbelt Reminder.........................................35 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance................................................37 Seatbelt Extension.........................................37 Locks Locking and Unlocking.................................58 Keyless Entry.....................................................61 Interior Luggage Compartment Release..........................................................63 Security Passive Anti-Theft System........................65 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66 Personal Safety System™ Personal Safety System™..........................38 Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67 Audio Control..................................................68 1 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents Voice Control...................................................69 Cruise Control.................................................69 Information Display Control.......................70 Heated Steering Wheel................................70 Climate Control Manual Climate Control..............................117 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles Without: Sony Audio System................119 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System.....................120 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate.........................................................122 Heated Windows and Mirrors..................125 Cabin Air Filter................................................125 Remote Start..................................................125 Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers..........................................71 Autowipers.........................................................71 Windshield Washers......................................72 Lighting General Information......................................73 Lighting Control...............................................73 Autolamps........................................................74 Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................75 Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................75 Daytime Running Lamps.............................76 Automatic High Beam Control..................76 Front Fog Lamps............................................78 Direction Indicators........................................78 Interior Lamps.................................................78 Ambient Lighting...........................................80 Seats Sitting in the Correct Position...................127 Head Restraints.............................................127 Manual Seats.................................................129 Power Seats....................................................129 Memory Function...........................................131 Rear Seats.......................................................133 Heated Seats..................................................134 Climate Controlled Seats..........................135 Rear Seat Armrest........................................136 Universal Garage Door Opener Windows and Mirrors Power Windows...............................................81 Global Opening and Closing......................82 Exterior Mirrors................................................82 Interior Mirror...................................................84 Sun Visors.........................................................84 Moonroof..........................................................84 Universal Garage Door Opener................137 Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power Points................................142 Storage Compartments Center Console..............................................144 Overhead Console........................................145 Instrument Cluster Gauges...............................................................86 Warning Lamps and Indicators................89 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............92 Starting and Stopping the Engine General Information....................................146 Keyless Starting............................................146 Starting a Gasoline Engine........................147 Engine Block Heater....................................149 Information Displays General Information......................................93 Information Messages................................102 2 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents Active Park Assist.........................................185 Rear View Camera.......................................190 Unique Driving Characteristics Auto-Start-Stop.............................................151 Cruise Control Fuel and Refueling Principle of Operation................................194 Using Cruise Control...................................194 Using Adaptive Cruise Control................195 Safety Precautions.......................................153 Fuel Quality....................................................154 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154 Running Out of Fuel....................................156 Refueling..........................................................157 Fuel Consumption.......................................159 Emission Control System..........................160 Driving Aids Automatic Transmission............................163 Driver Alert.....................................................202 Lane Keeping System................................203 Blind Spot Information System..............207 Cross Traffic Alert.......................................209 Steering.............................................................212 Pre-Collision Assist......................................213 All-Wheel Drive Load Carrying Using All-Wheel Drive................................168 Load Limit........................................................217 Brakes Towing General Information.....................................173 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................173 Electric Parking Brake..................................174 Hill Start Assist..............................................176 Towing a Trailer.............................................222 Recommended Towing Weights............223 Essential Towing Checks..........................224 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......226 Transmission Driving Hints Traction Control Breaking-In.....................................................228 Economical Driving.....................................228 Driving Through Water...............................228 Floor Mats.......................................................229 Principle of Operation.................................178 Using Traction Control................................178 Stability Control Roadside Emergencies Principle of Operation.................................179 Using Stability Control...............................180 Roadside Assistance...................................231 Hazard Warning Flashers..........................232 Fuel Shutoff...................................................232 Jump Starting the Vehicle........................233 Post-Crash Alert System..........................235 Spinout Detection.......................................235 Transporting the Vehicle...........................236 Parking Aids Principle of Operation..................................181 Rear Parking Aid.............................................181 Front Parking Aid..........................................182 Side Sensing System..................................183 3 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.7L EcoBoost™.......................................267 Brake Fluid Check........................................268 Washer Fluid Check....................................269 Changing the 12V Battery.........................269 Checking the Wiper Blades......................270 Changing the Wiper Blades.......................271 Adjusting the Headlamps..........................271 Removing a Headlamp..............................273 Changing a Bulb...........................................274 Bulb Specification Chart...........................276 Changing the Engine Air Filter.................278 Towing Points................................................236 Customer Assistance Getting the Services You Need...............238 In California (U.S. Only)............................239 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only).....................240 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only)........................241 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada.........................................................241 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature....................................................242 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).............................................................243 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only).............................................................243 Vehicle Care General Information...................................279 Cleaning Products.......................................279 Cleaning the Exterior..................................279 Waxing............................................................280 Cleaning the Engine.....................................281 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades...........................................................281 Cleaning the Interior...................................282 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens.......................282 Cleaning Leather Seats.............................283 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............283 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................283 Vehicle Storage............................................284 Fuses Fuse Specification Chart..........................245 Changing a Fuse..........................................254 Maintenance General Information...................................256 Opening and Closing the Hood..............256 Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoost™................................................257 Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost™................................................258 Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................259 Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™...............................................260 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L EcoBoost™.................................................261 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/ 2.5L/2.7L EcoBoost™.............................261 Engine Oil Check...........................................261 Oil Change Indicator Reset......................262 Engine Coolant Check...............................263 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 1.5L EcoBoost™/2.0L EcoBoost™/ 2.5L...............................................................266 Wheels and Tires Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................286 Tire Care..........................................................292 Using Summer Tires..................................308 Using Snow Chains....................................308 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........309 Changing a Road Wheel.............................312 Technical Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™/2.0L EcoBoost™/ 2.5L................................................................318 Technical Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................319 4 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Table of Contents SYNC™ Applications and Services......376 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player............................................................381 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................390 Capacities and Specifications Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™.................................................321 Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™.................................................321 Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................322 Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™................................................323 Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™......323 Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™......325 Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L..............................326 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™......327 Vehicle Identification Number................327 Vehicle Certification Label.......................328 Transmission Code Designation............329 Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™...............................................330 Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™................................................333 Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L....336 Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™...............................................340 SYNC™ 3 General Information...................................398 Home Screen..................................................411 Using Voice Recognition............................412 Entertainment...............................................419 Climate............................................................429 Phone................................................................431 Navigation.......................................................437 Apps.................................................................445 Settings...........................................................448 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................460 Accessories Accessories....................................................473 Extended Service Plan (ESP) Extended Service Plan (ESP).................475 Audio System Scheduled Maintenance General Information...................................345 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/ CD.................................................................346 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC/Satellite Radio............................348 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/ CD.................................................................350 Digital Radio..................................................354 Satellite Radio..............................................356 USB Port.........................................................359 Media Hub......................................................359 General Maintenance Information........477 Normal Scheduled Maintenance.........480 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance.............................................483 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........485 Appendices End User License Agreement.................496 Type Approvals..............................................512 SYNC™ General Information...................................360 Using Voice Recognition...........................362 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............364 5 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing 6 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E154903 A Right-hand side. B Left-hand side. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Safety alert Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to the vehicle you have purchased. See Owner's Manual Air conditioning system Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. E162384 Anti-lock braking system Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle. Battery Battery acid This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum based 7 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction Brake system Front airbag Cabin air filter Front fog lamps Check fuel cap Fuel pump reset Child safety door lock or unlock Fuse compartment Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window Cruise control Heated windshield Do not open when hot Interior luggage compartment release Engine air filter Jack Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children E71340 E161353 Engine coolant temperature Lighting control Engine oil Low tire pressure warning Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level Fan warning Note operating instructions Fasten seatbelt Panic alarm 8 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic information for vehicle improvement or with other information we may have about you, (e.g., your contact information), to offer you products or services that may interest you. Data may be provided to our service providers such as part suppliers that may help diagnose malfunctions, and who are similarly obligated to protect data. We retain this data only as long as necessary to perform these functions or to comply with law. We may provide information where required in response to official requests to law enforcement or other government authorities or third parties acting with lawful authority or court order, and such information may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use connected apps and services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used to provide services to you, personalizing your experience, troubleshoot, and to improve products and services and offer you products and services that may interest you, where permitted by law. For Canada only, for more information, please review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage and use of service providers in other jurisdictions who may be subject to Parking aid E139213 Parking brake Power steering fluid Power windows front/rear Power window lockout Service engine soon Side airbag Shield the eyes E167012 Stability control E138639 Windshield wash and wipe DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada in Canada), and service 9 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction legal requirements in Canada, the United States and other countries applicable to them, for example, lawful requirements to disclose personal information to governmental authorities in those countries. See SYNC™ (page 360). Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal; and • How fast the vehicle was traveling; and • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. 10 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 360). CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGS Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. PERCHLORATE Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel information”), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and Information, Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™ (page 360). For more information visit: Web Address www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate FORD CREDIT US Only Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. 11 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction We offer a number of convenient ways for you to contact us and help to manage your account. vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. Call 1-800-727-7000. For more information about Ford Credit and access to the Account Manager, go to www.fordcredit.com. Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of failed non-Ford parts. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION We have built your vehicle to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual. Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. Special Instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. WARNINGS You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Collision Repairs We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During Never place front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats in front of an active passenger airbag. 12 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING Use of wireless plug-in devices in the OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) may allow unauthorized third parties to gain access to vehicle systems and data which could impair the function of various vehicle systems, including safety-related systems. The DLC should only be used by a repair facility that operates in accordance with Ford’s service and repair instructions. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming services. Installing an aftermarket device that uses the DLC during normal driving for purposes such as remote insurance company monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to other devices or entities, or altering the performance of the vehicle, may cause interference with or even damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will not cover damage caused by an aftermarket plug-in device. Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, 13 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Introduction recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. 14 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Environment PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. 15 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. WARNINGS Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. All children are shaped differently. The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height, age and weight thresholds from the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. 16 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Infants or toddlers Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat). Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Use a belt-positioning booster seat. Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least Larger children 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer). • • • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada. Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front Passenger Sensing System (page 41). Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seat back upright. INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS Child Seats E142594 17 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Recommended restraint type Child Safety • Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or children weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less (generally age four or younger). • Using Lap and Shoulder Belts Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position. Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat. Standard safety belts Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. E142528 1. When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position. • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. E142529 18 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety 2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue. E142875 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142531 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E142533 19 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will provide extra help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Inflatable safety belts E142528 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. E142534 10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement for proper installation. E146522 2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. 20 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety E142530 E146524 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the lap portion of the inflatable safety belt and pull upward until all of the belt is pulled out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion locks the child seat for installation. The ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to move freely is normal, even after the lap belt has been put into the automatic locking mode. Note: The lock-off device on some child restraints may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the lock-off device. In some instances, these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with safety belt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip. E146523 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 21 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142534 10. E146525 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling down on the lap belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) WARNINGS Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. 22 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement for proper installation. Child Safety Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol. WARNINGS Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors located where seat back and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position. E144054 The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the symbols as shown. Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments. Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat, however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown. Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches (28 centimeters) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle. E142535 23 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle. The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches (46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position. LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor. Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats E142537 Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors: When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. Using Tether Straps Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. 24 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety 1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. For outboard seating positions, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For the center seating positions, route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint. If needed, the head restraints can also be removed. BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt. Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). E144274 2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position, then open the tether anchor cover. Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat: E144275 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions. If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. E142595 25 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety • • • • • Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion? Can the child sit without slouching? Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? E70710 Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. • Types of Booster Seats Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips. E68924 • Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat. 26 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing High back booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. Child Safety E142596 E142597 WARNINGS the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat. If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all 27 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Child Safety WARNINGS manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death. WARNINGS Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death. Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash. To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X Restraint Type Combined weight of child and child seat LATCH (lower anchors and top tether anchor) LATCH (lower anchors only) Rear facing Up to 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt and LATCH only and top (lower tether anchors anchor and top tether anchor) X X Rear facing Over 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Over 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Seats (page 127). X X X CHILD SAFETY LOCKS When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. 28 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing X Child Safety E112197 The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock. 29 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Properly restrain children 12 and under in the rear seat whenever possible. WARNINGS Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Seatbelts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather. They could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash. Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women, should wear seatbelts for optimum protection in an accident. All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. All seating positions in your vehicle have lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seatbelt properly. The seatbelt system consists of: • Lap and shoulder seatbelts. • Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking mode, (except driver seatbelt). • Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions. • Seatbelt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the seatbelt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. 30 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing • Seatbelt warning light and chime. • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. Seatbelts The seatbelt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. The pretensioners may also activate when the Safety Canopy is deployed. FASTENING THE SEATBELTS E142588 Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar 2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the seatbelt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The shoulder portion of the seatbelt should be positioned across the chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the following figure. E142587 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue in the buckle. E142590 31 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts Pregnant women should always wear their seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow. The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination seatbelts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. Seatbelt Locking Modes WARNINGS After any vehicle crash, the seatbelt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all seatbelts should be checked for proper function. In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner. Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seatbelt. The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seatbelt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other seatbelt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes. When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible. See Child Safety (page 16). All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive locking mode. The front outboard passenger and rear seatbelts have both the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the automatic locking mode. How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Standard seatbelts 32 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. E142591 Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped) 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. WARNINGS Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the rear inflatable seatbelt. If the rear inflatable seatbelt deploys, it will not function again. You must have an authorized dealer replace the rear inflatable seatbelt. Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second row only–if equipped) The rear inflatable seatbelts are fitted in the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the second-row outboard seating positions. Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are compatible with most infant and child safety car seats and belt positioning booster seats when properly installed. This is because they are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a slower rate than traditional airbags. After inflation, the shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool to the touch. E146363 The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the following: • An inflatable bag located in the shoulder seatbelt webbing. • Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic locking mode. 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull upward until the entire belt is pulled out. 33 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts • • The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front seatbelts. Impact sensors located in various parts of the vehicle. The fully inflated belt's increased diameter more effectively holds the occupant in the appropriate seating position, and spreads crash forces over more area of the body than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on the chest and helps control head and neck motion for passengers. How does the rear inflatable seatbelt system work? The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes and in some side impact crashes and rollover crashes. The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The rear inflatable seatbelts will function like standard restraints in everyday usage. SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING Position the safety belt height adjuster so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash. E146364 During a crash of sufficient force, the inflatable belt will inflate from inside the webbing. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. E146365 E145664 To adjust the shoulder belt height: 34 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts 1. Pull the button and slide the height adjuster up or down. 2. Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the driver's safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on. Conditions of operation If... Then... The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position... The safety belt warning light illuminates 12 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator the ignition switch is turned to the on posichime remain off. tion... The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid the system turning on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you place on the front passenger seat, only the front seat passengers receive warnings as determined by the front passenger sensing system. SEATBELT REMINDER Belt-Minder™ This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the safety belt warning light when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a safety belt is unbuckled. If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings for about five minutes) for one passenger (driver or front passenger), the other passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder feature to turn on. 35 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts If... Then... You and the front seat passenger buckle The Belt-Minder feature will not activate. your safety belts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts. The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts. Before following the procedure, make sure that: • The parking brake is set. • The transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). • The ignition is off. • The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled. Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature WARNING While the system allows you to switch this feature off, the intent of the system is to remind you to wear your safety belt to improve your chance to survive an accident. We recommend you leave the system switched on for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the vehicle. 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about 1 minute). After Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds before proceeding with Step 3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 30 seconds. 3. For the seating position you are switching off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the safety belt warning light turns on. Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch on and off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process. Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure. 36 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seatbelts 4. While the safety belt warning light is on, buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt warning light flashes for confirmation. • This will switch the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on. • This will switch the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off. SEATBELT EXTENSION WARNINGS Persons who fit into the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an extension. Unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of a crash. Only use extensions provided free of charge by Ford Motor Company dealers. The dealer will provide an extension designed specifically for this vehicle, model year and seating position. The use of an extension intended for another vehicle, model year or seating position may not offer you the full protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt restraint system. CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. Never use seatbelt extensions to install child restraints. Do not use a seatbelt extension with an inflatable seatbelt. Do not use extensions to change the fit of the belt across the torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to reach. If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fasten the seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an extension that is compatible with the seatbelts is available free of charge from Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford seatbelt extensions made by the original equipment seatbelts manufacturer should be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your extension is compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint system. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle Care (page 279). 37 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Personal Safety System™ How Does the Personal Safety System Work? The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations. The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of the safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions. The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists of: • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. • Front seat outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors and safety belt usage sensors. • Driver seat position sensor. • Front passenger sensing system. • Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp. • Front crash severity sensors. • Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. • Restraint system warning light and backup tone. • The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, front passenger sensing system and indicator lights. 38 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. 39 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNING WARNINGS Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. E151127 The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes. Children and Airbags WARNING The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of: • Driver and passenger airbag modules. • Front passenger sensing system. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 46). 40 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System WARNINGS between the seat and the center console. Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system. E142846 Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system. This could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash. This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and seatbelt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNINGS Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. E227975 The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator that illuminates indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled). Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. The indicator lamp is at the top center of the instrument panel. Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON indicator lamps illuminate for a short period of time when you first switch the ignition on to confirm it is functional. To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not stow objects in the seatback map pocket or hang objects off a seatback if a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or 41 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty. • • The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat. • When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator illuminatse the ON lamp and remains illuminated. If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. • Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger frontal airbag. • If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even after this, advise the person to ride in the rear seat. When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the OFF lamp and stays lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. If you install the child restraint and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Occupant Passenger airbag status indicator Passenger airbag Empty OFF: Lit Disabled ON: Unlit Child OFF: Lit Disabled ON: Unlit Adult OFF: Unlit ON: Lit 42 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Enabled Supplementary Restraints System Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF light illuminates, the passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries. SIDE AIRBAGS WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident. Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Make sure the front passenger sensing system is operating properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 46). If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer. If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. See Getting the Services You Need (page 238). The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes. 43 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System DRIVER AND PASSENGER KNEE AIRBAGS Driver and passenger knee airbags are located under or within the instrument panel. During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the driver and passenger knee airbags (individually or both) based on crash severity and respective occupant conditions. Under certain crash and occupant conditions, the driver and passenger knee airbags may deploy (individually or both) but the corresponding front airbag may not activate. As with front and side airbags, it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. E152533 The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. • Side airbags located inside the driver and front passenger seatbacks. • Front passenger sensing system. • Make sure the knee airbags are operating properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 46). Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 46). SAFETY CANOPY™ WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat. The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags. Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 44 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System WARNINGS All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag. E75004 If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags (including the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. The system consists of the following: • Safety canopy curtain airbags located above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim. • A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with a readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 46). Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening. The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy). 45 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash. CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. The seatbelt pretensioners and the front airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device. The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. • The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. • The seatbelt pretensioners and rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes and rollovers. • The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on crash severity and occupant conditions. Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module. The restraints control module deploys (activates) the front seatbelt system, the adaptive collapsible steering column, driver airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side airbags, Safety Canopy and optional rear inflatable seatbelts. Based on the type of crash, the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices. The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or a backup tone (if equipped). Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on. • • The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. A series of five beeps will be heard (If equipped). The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired. 46 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System • • The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover. AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. 47 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls Intelligent Access (If Equipped) GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met: • You activate the front exterior door handle switch. • You press the luggage compartment button. • You press a button on the transmitter. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low, you may need to mechanically unlock your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation. See Remote Control (page 48). Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range: • Weather conditions. • Nearby radio towers. • Structures around the vehicle. • Other vehicles parked next to your vehicle. REMOTE CONTROL Intelligent Access Key The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended. E218399 Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally. 48 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls Using the Key Blade The intelligent access keys operate the power locks and the remote start system. The key must be in your vehicle to use the push button start. The key cylinder is under a cap on the driver door handle. To remove the cap: Removable Key Blade The intelligent access key also contains a removable key blade that you can use to unlock your vehicle. E151956 1. Insert the key blade into the slot on the bottom of the handle and apply upward pressure. 2. While maintaining upward pressure, move the cap rearward to release it. Gently remove the key while doing so. E218400 Push the release button and pull the key blade out. To install the cap: E151795 Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. E151957 49 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls 1. Place the cap just forward of the key cylinder. 2. Applying pressure to the cap, move it forward until it is in place. You may hear a snap as it engages. 1. Push the release button and pull the key blade out. Make sure you have properly installed the cap by trying to move it rearward. Replacing the Battery Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries. Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally. A message appears in the information display when the remote control battery is low. See Information Messages (page 102). The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. E218401 2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the key blade head to remove the battery cover. E218400 50 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls Remote Start (If Equipped) WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or in areas that are not well ventilated. Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel level is low. The remote start button is on the transmitter. E138625 This feature allows you to start your vehicle from the outside. The transmitter has an extended operating range. If your vehicle has automatic climate control, you can configure it to operate when you remote start your vehicle. See Climate Control (page 117). A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when you switched your vehicle off. E218402 3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and carefully remove the battery. 4. Install a new battery with the + facing upward. 5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key blade. Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems. Car Finder Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn sounds E138623 and the direction indicators flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm. The remote start system does not work if any of the following occur: • The ignition is on. • The anti-theft alarm triggers. • You switch the feature off in the information display. • The hood is open. • The transmission is not in park (P). • The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. Sounding the Panic Alarm Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off. E138624 Press the button to sound the panic alarm. Press the button again or switch the ignition on to turn it off. 51 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls The horn sounds if the system fails to start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. See General Information (page 93). Remote Control Feedback (If Equipped) An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands. LED. Status Solid green. Remote start or extension successful. Solid red. Remote stop successful; vehicle off. Blinking red. Remote start or stop failed. Blinking green. Waiting for status update. Note: You must press the push button ignition switch on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle. The power windows do not work during remote start and the radio does not turn on automatically. The parking lamps remain on and your vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on the setting. Extending the Engine Running Time To extend the engine running time duration of your vehicle during remote start, repeat steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the duration extends by another 10 minutes. For example, if your vehicle had been running from the first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle continues to run now for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend the engine running time duration to a maximum of 30 minutes. Remote Starting your Vehicle Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. Your vehicle will not remote start if you do not follow this sequence. Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after the engine stops running. Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote Starting E138626 The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure. E138625 You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of your running vehicle. To remote start your vehicle: 1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors. 2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps flash twice. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. See General Information (page 93). 52 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Press the button once. Your vehicle and the parking lamps turn off. Keys and Remote Controls Memory Feature You can program your intelligent access key to recall memory positions. See Memory Function (page 131). REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 65). 53 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ Standard Settings PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Not every vehicle includes the features listed below. If your vehicle has this equipment, then you cannot change the following settings when using a MyKey: • Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. MyKey mutes the audio system until drivers, and in some instances, passengers, fasten their seatbelts. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not mute. • Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel warning activates earlier for MyKey drivers, giving them more time to refuel. • Certain driver alerts, stability systems or parking aids turn on automatically when you use the MyKey system. For example, Blind Spot Information System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane departure warning or forward collision warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be able to turn the lane departure warning feature off, but this feature turns back on automatically with every new key cycle. • Restricted touchscreen operation in some markets. For example, MyKey may prevent manual navigation destination input while the vehicle is in any gear other than park (P) or when the vehicle reaches a certain rate of speed. • Satellite radio adult content restrictions, if this feature is available in your market. MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. You can program the restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys that you did not program are administrator keys or admin keys. You can use admin keys to: • Create a MyKey with certain vehicle restrictions. • Program certain MyKey settings. • Clear all MyKey restrictions. After you program a MyKey, you can view the following information through the information display: • The total number of admin keys and MyKeys for your vehicle. • The total distance a MyKey driver traveled with your vehicle. Note: Every MyKey receives the same restrictions and settings. You cannot program them individually. Note: For vehicles equipped with a push-button start switch: When both a MyKey and an admin key are present when you start your vehicle, the system recognizes the admin key only. Optional Settings You can configure certain vehicle feature settings when you first create a MyKey. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key. 54 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ Note: Not every feature applies to every vehicle in every market. When they are available for your vehicle, then they appear in your information display, providing choices to switch them on or off, or to select a more specific setting. • • • Various vehicle speed limits so the MyKey driver cannot exceed certain speeds. The information display shows warnings followed by an audible tone when the MyKey driver reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal. WARNING Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury. • Various vehicle speed reminders so MyKey drivers know when their vehicle speed approaches the limits. Warnings appear in your information display and a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers exceed the set vehicle speed. The audio system's maximum volume limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can concentrate on the road. A message appears in the information display when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the limited volume. MyKey also disables the automatic volume control. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not limit. Always on setting. This setting forces certain features to remain on and active for MyKey drivers. For example, E911 or emergency assistance and the do not disturb features stay on even if a MyKey driver uses the feature's control to switch it off. CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey. 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or the transmitter you want to program. 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to begin programming your MyKey. See Information Displays (page 93). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. 4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish programming your MyKey. The programmed restrictions apply when you restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter. Note: Make sure you label the programmed MyKey so you can distinguish it from the admin keys. 55 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ 4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish clearing your MyKeys. Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status. You cannot remove the MyKey restrictions individually. You can also program the optional MyKey settings. Programming or Changing Configurable Settings Use the information display to program or change your optional MyKey settings. 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or the transmitter you want to program. 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to change the settings of your MyKey. See Information Displays (page 93). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. 4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish programming your MyKey. The programmed restrictions apply when you restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter. Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you switch the engine off, you must use an admin key to change or clear your optional MyKey settings. CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). MyKey Distance Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey. Number of MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys have been deleted. CLEARING ALL MYKEYS When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once. To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display. Number of Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many admin keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed. 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to begin clearing your MyKey programming. See Information Displays (page 93). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. 56 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing MyKey™ Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system. USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is not compatible with non MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Condition I cannot create a MyKey. Potential causes · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into the backup position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 147). · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at least one admin key. · SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode. I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55). For vehicles with keyless start: No MyKey · An admin transmitter is present when you restrictions are available when starting the started your vehicle. vehicle. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55). I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 55). I lost the only admin key. · Purchase a new key or tranmitter from your authorized dealer. I lost a key. · Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see your authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 65). MyKey distances do not accumulate. · The MyKey user is not using the MyKey. · An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys. · The key system has been reset. 57 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Rear Door Unlocking and Opening You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle. Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull opens the door. Power Door Locks Remote Control The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels. You can use the remote control at any time. The luggage compartment release button only works when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h). Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock) Press the button to unlock the driver door. E138629 Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The direction indicators will flash. E138628 A Unlock. B Lock. Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for three seconds to change between driver door or all doors unlock mode. The direction indicators will flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode. Driver door mode only unlocks the driver door when you press the unlock button once. All door mode unlocks all doors when you press the unlock button once. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent access. You can also change between the unlocking modes using the information display. See General Information (page 93). Door Lock Indicator An LED on the door window trim illuminates when you lock the door. They will remain illuminated for up to five minutes after you switch the ignition off. Door Lock Switch Inhibitor When you electronically lock your vehicle, the power door lock switch no longer operates after 20 seconds. You must unlock your vehicle with the remote control or keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on, to restore function to these switches. You can switch this feature off in the information display. See General Information (page 93). Locking the Doors Note: Switch the ignition on and off after changing the setting in the information display. E138623 58 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Press the button to lock all doors. The direction indicators will flash. Locks Activating Intelligent Access (If Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will sound and the direction indicators will flash if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed. Equipped) You must have the intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Unlocking the Doors Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and open the door. Make sure not to touch the lock sensor area on the top of the handle. Locking the Doors E157085 Touch the top of the door handle to lock your vehicle. There is a brief delay before you can unlock your vehicle again. E112203 If the central locking function does not operate, lock the doors individually using the key in the position shown. On the left-hand side, turn the key clockwise to lock. On the right-hand side, turn the key counterclockwise to lock. Note: Keep the door handle clean to make sure the system operates correctly. Mislock If any door or the luggage compartment is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will sound twice and the lamps will not flash. You can enable or disable this feature in the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). Opening the Luggage Compartment E138630 Press twice within three seconds to open the luggage compartment. 59 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks Opening the Luggage Compartment To do this, lock your vehicle after you have closed all the doors by: • Using the keyless entry keypad. • Pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key. • Touching the locking area on the front of the door handle with another intelligent access key in your hand. When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control, all doors will lock then unlock if: • The ignition is on. • The ignition is off and the transmission is not in park (P). Autolock (If Equipped) Autolock locks all the doors when all of the following occur: • All doors are closed. • The ignition is on. • You shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). E207425 Press the exterior release button hidden above the license plate. Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys Autolock repeats when: • You open then close any door when the ignition is on and your vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). This feature helps to prevent you from locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear cargo area. When you electronically lock your vehicle with any door open, the transmission is in park (P) and the ignition is off, the system searches for an intelligent access key inside your vehicle after you close the last door. If the system finds a key, all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will sound twice, indicating that a key is inside. You can override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle. 60 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks Autounlock The lights will not turn off if: • You turn them on with the lamp control. • Any door is open. Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of the following occur: • The ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and your vehicle has been moving at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you switch the ignition off or to the accessory position. • You open the driver door within 10 minutes of switching the ignition off or to accessory. Illuminated Exit The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch the ignition off. The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and: • 25 seconds have elapsed. • You press the push button ignition switch. Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off with the driver door closed, the doors will not autounlock. Battery Saver If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off. Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock Note: You can switch autounlock and autolock on or off independently of each other. Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys Autolock is not configurable in all markets. If the autolock settings are not available in your information display, then the system is not configurable. See General Information (page 93). If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts off when it detects a certain amount of battery drain, or after 45 minutes. KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped) Illuminated Entry SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote control. The keypad is near the driver window. It illuminates when touched. The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if: • The ignition is on. • You press the remote control lock button. • After 25 seconds of illumination. Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock function may not work. Enter your entry code again more slowly. 61 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks To program additional personal entry codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4: • Press 3·4 to save personal code 2. • Press 5·6 to save personal code 3. • Press 7·8 to save personal code 4. • Press 9·0 to save personal code 5. You can also program a personal entry code using the touchscreen. Hints: • Do not set a code that uses five of the same number. • Do not use five numbers in sequential order. • The factory-set code works even if you have set your own personal code. E138637 You can use the keypad to do the following: • Lock or unlock the doors. • Release the luggage compartment. • Recall memory seat and mirror positions. • Program and erase user codes. • Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. Recalling Memory Positions (If Equipped) The programmed entry codes recall driver memory positions as follows: • Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory positions. • Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory positions. • Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory positions. You can operate the keypad with the factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer. You can also program up to five of your own five-digit personal entry codes. Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not recall memory positions. Programming a Personal Entry Code Erasing a Personal Code 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. 2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You must press each number within five seconds of each other. 4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal code 1. 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. 2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Press 1·2 and hold for two seconds. You must do this within five seconds of completing step 2. All personal codes erase and only the factory-set five-digit code works. The doors lock then unlock to confirm that programming was successful. 62 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Locks 1. Anti-Scan Feature The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times. This mode turns off the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp flashes. Anti-scan turns off after any of the following occur: • One minute of keypad inactivity. • You press the unlock button on the remote control. • You switch the ignition on. • You unlock the vehicle using intelligent access. E155835 2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the cup holder. With the buttons facing upward and the unlock button facing the front of your vehicle, place the first intelligent access key into the backup slot (B). 3. Press the push button ignition switch once and wait a few seconds. 4. Press the push button ignition switch again and remove the key. 5. Insert the second programmed key into the backup slot, and then press the push button ignition switch. Locking and Unlocking the Doors Locking All Doors Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad simultaneously with the driver door closed. You do not need to enter a code first. Unlocking Only the Driver Door Enter the factory-set or your personal five-digit code. You must press each number within five seconds of each other. The interior lamps illuminate. Note: All doors unlock if you switch on the all door unlocking mode. See Locking and Unlocking (page 58). The factory-set code appears in the information display for a few seconds. Note: The code may not display until after any other warning messages first display. Unlocking All Doors Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within five seconds. INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE Opening the Luggage Compartment WARNINGS Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles. Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within five seconds. Displaying the Factory-Set Code Note: You need to have two programmed keys for this procedure. 63 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Remove the key blade from the transmitter. Locks The handle is located inside the luggage compartment either on the luggage compartment door (lid) or near the tail lamps. It is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light. WARNINGS Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. Pull the handle and push up on the luggage compartment door (lid) to open from within the luggage compartment. Your vehicle is equipped with a release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults if they become locked inside the luggage compartment. Adults should familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle. E144403 64 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Security The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and turns on the intelligent access with push button start system, as well as a remote control. PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in engine starting problems and a loss of security protection. If your programmed transmitters are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys. Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may result in vehicle starting problems, especially if they are too close to the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching the coded key when starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart your vehicle if a problem occurs. Store a spare intelligent access key away from your vehicle in a safe place. You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer. Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key Note: You can program a maximum of four keys to your vehicle. Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle. You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside your vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access key readily accessible. You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer. SecuriLock® The system helps prevent the engine from starting unless you use a coded key programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong key may prevent your vehicle from starting. A message may appear in the information display. Automatic Arming Make sure that the ignition is switched off before beginning this procedure. Make sure that you close all the doors before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure. Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if you carry out any steps out of sequence. The system arms when you switch the ignition off. Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. If you are unable to start your vehicle with a coded key, it is not operating correctly. A message may appear in the information display. 1. Automatic Disarming The system disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key. Replacement Keys Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys. 65 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Remove the key blade from the transmitter. Security ANTI-THEFT ALARM The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if any door, the luggage compartment or the hood is opened without using the key, remote control or keyless entry keypad. The direction indicators will flash and the horn will sound if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed. E155835 Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle. 2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the cup holder. With the buttons facing upward and the unlock button facing the front of your vehicle, place the first intelligent access key into the backup slot (B). 3. Press the push button ignition switch. 4. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again. 5. Remove the intelligent access key. 6. Within 10 seconds, place a second programmed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the push button ignition switch. 7. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again. 8. Remove the intelligent access key. 9. Wait five seconds, then place the unprogrammed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the push button ignition switch. Arming the Alarm The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your vehicle to arm the alarm. Disarming the Alarm Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions: • • • Note: Pressing the panic button on the remote control will stop the horn and signal indicators, but will not disarm the system. Programming is now complete. Check that the remote control functions operate and your vehicle starts with the new intelligent access key. If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10 seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If it still does not work, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer. 66 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control or keyless entry keypad. Switch your vehicle on or start your vehicle. Use a key in the driver door to unlock your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on within 12 seconds. Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 127). E223492 3. Lock the steering column. Power Tilt and Telescope Steering Column (If Equipped) WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 127). E223369 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 67 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Steering Wheel Memory Feature You can save and recall the steering column position with the memory function. See Memory Function (page 131). Note: Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall cancels the operation. The column responds to the adjustment control. Easy Entry and Exit Feature When you switch the ignition off, the steering column will move to the full up position to allow extra room to exit your vehicle. The column will return to the previous setting when you switch the ignition on. You can enable or disable this feature in the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). E161834 Use the control on the side of the steering column to adjust the position. AUDIO CONTROL To adjust: • Tilt: press the top or bottom of the control. • Telescope: press the front or rear of the control. Select the required source on the audio unit. Operate the following functions with the control: The steering column sets a stopping position just short of the end of the column position to prevent damage to the steering column. A new stopping position sets if the steering column encounters an object when tilting or telescoping. To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position: 1. Press the steering column control again after encountering the new stopping position. 2. Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column position. E191234 A new stopping position is set. The next time you tilt or telescope the steering column, it will stop just short of the end of the column position. 68 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Volume up. B Volume down. C Mute. D Mode. Steering Wheel E Seek down or previous. CRUISE CONTROL F Seek up or next. Type 1 MODE Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio sources. Seek, Next or Previous Press the seek button to: • tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band. • seek through a track. E197198 Type 2 VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped) E222797 See Cruise Control (page 194). E168194 Press the button to select or deselect voice control. See your SYNC information. 69 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Steering Wheel INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL E144636 See Information Displays (page 93). Information Display Control Features E144811 This control functions the same as the center control on the faceplate. See General Information (page 345). Use this control to adjust the right side of the information display. Navigate through the screen and press OK to select. HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped) See your SYNC information. 70 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wipers and Washers Intermittent Wipe WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. A B Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. C Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. E169314 D C A Shortest wipe interval B Intermittent wipe C Longest wipe interval Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval. B Speed Dependent Wipers When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases. A AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped) E169313 A Single wipe B Intermittent wipe C Normal wipe D High speed wipe Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper Blades (page 270). If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 271). Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in the area around the interior mirror. The rain sensor will continue to monitor the amount of water on the windshield and automatically adjust the speed of the wipers. 71 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wipers and Washers Autowipers Settings (If Equipped) Autowipers default to on and remain on until you switch it off in the information display. With autowipers switched off, the wipers operate in intermittent mode. See General Information (page 93). WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. E197526 A High sensitivity B On C Low sensitivity Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the autowipers. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. When you select high sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield. E169316 Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. To operate the washers and spray the windshield, pull the lever toward you. A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid. This feature can be switched on or off in the information display. See General Information (page 93). Wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or salty road mist can cause inconsistent and unexpected wiping or smearing. In these conditions, you can do the following: • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing on the windshield. • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe. • Switch autowipers off. Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. 72 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in Lamp Assemblies Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. E142449 Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. Examples of acceptable condensation are: • The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets). • A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. A Off B Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps C Headlamps High Beams Examples of unacceptable condensation are: • A water puddle inside the lamp. • Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. E162679 Push the lever forward to switch the high beams on. Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off. 73 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Headlamp Flasher If equipped, the following also activate when the lighting control is in the autolamps position and you switch them on in the information display: • Configurable daytime running lamps. • Automatic high beam control. • Adaptive headlamp control. The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on. See Information Displays (page 93). E162680 Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps position, you cannot switch the high beam headlamps on until the autolamps system turns the low beam headlamps on. Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps. AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps WARNING The autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime fog. Always ensure that your headlamps are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a collision. The windshield wiper activated headlamps turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on and the lighting control is in the autolamps position. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off. The headlamps will not turn on by wiper activation: • During a mist wipe. • When the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition. • If the wipers are in intermittent mode. Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. E142451 When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps automatically turn on in low light situations or when the wipers activate. 74 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER B A Note: If you disconnect the battery or it becomes discharged, the illuminated components will switch to the maximum setting. Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps E165366 A Press repeatedly or press and hold to dim. B Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten. HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY After you switch the ignition off, you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on. E132712 Press repeatedly or press and hold until you reach the desired level. 75 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions or the parking brake is released for vehicles with manual transmissions. 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps position. 5. The headlamps are off. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If Equipped) WARNING The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Also, the autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure the headlamps are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. The other lighting control switch positions do not activate the daytime running lamps, and you can use them to temporarily override autolamp control. When switched off in the information display, the daytime running lamps are off in all lighting control switch positions. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL (If Equipped) Type 1 - Conventional (NonConfigurable) The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. The ignition is switched to the on position. 2. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions or the parking brake is released for vehicles with manual transmissions. 3. The lighting control is in the off, parking lamp or autolamps positions. 4. The headlamps are off. The system will automatically turn on your high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. When it detects the headlights of an approaching vehicle, the tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or street lighting, the system will turn off the high beams before they distract other drivers. The low beams remain on. Switch the daytime running lamps on or off using the information display controls. See Information Displays (page 93). Note: If it appears that automatic control of the high beams is not functioning properly, check the windshield in front of the camera for a blockage. A clear view of the road is required for proper system operation. Have any windshield damage in the area of the camera’s field-of-view repaired. The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. They are switched on in the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). 2. The ignition is switched to the on position. Note: If the system detects a blockage, for example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice, the system will go into low beam mode until you clear the blockage. A message may also appear in the instrument cluster display noting the front camera is blocked. Type 2 - Configurable 76 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots will not affect the performance of the automatic high beam system. However, in cold or inclement weather conditions, you will notice a decrease in the availability of the high beam system, especially at start up. If you want to change the beam state independently of the system, you may switch the high beams on or off using the multifunction switch. Automatic control will resume when conditions are correct. E142451 Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height such as using much larger tires, may degrade feature performance. Manually Overriding the System A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle, continuously monitors conditions to decide when to switch the high beams off and on. Once the system is active, the high beams will switch on if: • the ambient light level is low enough • there is no traffic in front of the vehicle • the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (52 km/h). E169254 The high beams will switch off if: • the system detects the headlamps of an approaching vehicle or the tail lamps of a preceding vehicle. • vehicle speed falls below approximately 27 mph (44 km/h) • the ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not required • the system detects severe rain, snow or fog • the camera is blocked. When the automatic control has activated the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk will provide a temporary override to low beam. Use the information display menu to permanently deactivate the system, or turn the lighting control switch from autolamps to headlamps. Activating the System Switch the system on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). Switch the autolamps on. See Autolamps (page 74). 77 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting INTERIOR LAMPS FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped) The lamps will turn on when you have met one of the following conditions: • • • You open any door. You press a remote control button. You press button A on the front interior lamp. Front Interior Lamp Note: The front interior lamp buttons are on the overhead console. The exact location of each button on the overhead console depends upon which roof, sunroof, and window shade features are equipped on the vehicle. E142453 Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off. You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except Off and the high beams are not on. Note: Press button B to switch the door function off when you open any door. The indicator lamp will light amber when the door function is off. When the door function is off and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps will stay off. Press button B again to switch the door function back on. The indicator lamp will light blue when the door function is on. When the door function is on and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps will light. DIRECTION INDICATORS E169255 Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change. 78 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Type 1 Type 2 A B C D D A B C D E192153 E201073 A Individual dome lamp. A All lamps on button. B Door function button. B Door function button. C All lamps off button. C All lamps off button. D Individual dome lamp. D Individual dome lamps. You can switch individual map lamps on independently by pressing a map lens. 79 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Lighting Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped) E169470 You can switch dome lamps on by pressing the button. AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped) Adjust the ambient lighting using the touchscreen. 80 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors Bounce-Back POWER WINDOWS The window will stop automatically while closing. It reverses some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Pull up the window switch and hold within a few seconds of the window reaching the bounce-back position. The window travels up with no bounce-back protection. The window stops if you release the switch before the window closes fully. Window Lock E146043 Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Press the switch to open the window. Lift the switch to close the window. One-Touch Down E144072 Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window. Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It will illuminate when you lock the rear window controls. One-Touch Up Accessory Delay Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window. You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door. 81 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING You can use the remote control to operate the windows with the ignition off. Note: You can enable or disable this feature in the information display or see an authorized dealer. See General Information (page 93). Note: To operate this feature, accessory delay must not be active. E144073 Opening the Windows A Left-hand mirror You can only open the windows for a short time after you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. After you unlock your vehicle, press and hold the remote control unlock button to open the windows and vent the moonroof. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement. B Adjustment control C Right-hand mirror To adjust a mirror: 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The control will illuminate. 2. Adjust the position of the mirror. 3. Press the mirror switch again. Closing the Windows Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors WARNING When closing the windows and moonroof, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. To close the windows and moonroof, press and hold the remote control lock button. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125). Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) Memory Mirrors (If Equipped) EXTERIOR MIRRORS You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function. See Memory Function (page 131). Power Exterior Mirrors Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped) WARNING The driver exterior mirror automatically dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns on. Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. 82 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped) The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when you switch on the turn signal. Puddle Lamps (If Equipped) The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror housing light when you use your transmitter to unlock the doors or when you open a door. C Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear. B Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They can increase your visibility along the side of your vehicle. A Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind spot mirror. If the blind spot mirror does not show any vehicles in its viewing area and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you intend to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes. E138665 The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance. The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches (A). The image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will transition to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C). Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) See Blind Spot Information System (page 207). 83 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors SUN VISORS INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving. Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products. You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side. E138666 Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade. Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night. Illuminated Vanity Mirror Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor. The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up. E162197 Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. MOONROOF (If Equipped) WARNINGS Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave them unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves. 84 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Windows and Mirrors Bounce-Back WARNINGS When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening. The moonroof will stop automatically and reverse some distance if an obstacle is detected while closing. Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of a bounce-back event to override this function. The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof is closed. Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it. Venting the Moonroof Touch (B) to vent the moonroof. Touch (C) to close it. The moonroof controls are located on the overhead console and have a one-touch open and close feature. To stop it during one-touch operation, touch the control a second time. E144499 A Open B Vent C Close Opening and Closing the Moonroof Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will stop short of the fully opened position. Note: This position helps to reduce wind noise or rumbling which may happen with the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again to fully open the moonroof. Touch (C) to close the moonroof. 85 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster GAUGES Type 1 and 2 E144485 A Tachometer B Information Display (Type 2 shown Type 1 similar) C Speedometer D Fuel Gauge E Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Compass Information Display Displays the vehicle’s heading direction. Odometer Trip Computer Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled. See General Information (page 93). 86 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster Vehicle Settings and Personalization The needle should move toward F when you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle needs service soon. See General Information (page 93). Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge After refueling some variability in needle position is normal: Shows the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle will remain in the center section. If the needle enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down. • • Note: Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved. WARNING • Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. It may take a short time for the needle to reach full after leaving the gas station. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. The fuel amount dispensed into the tank is a little less or more than the gauge indicated. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. If the gas station nozzle shuts off before the tank is full, try a different gas pump nozzle. There is a small reserve left in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches empty. Fuel Gauge • Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. Low Fuel Reminder A low fuel reminder triggers at 50 mi (80 km) to empty. Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Variations: Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal. 87 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster Type 3 E144486 A Left Information Display B Speedometer C Right Information Display. See General Information (page 93). Vehicle Settings and Personalization Left Information Display See General Information (page 93). Odometer Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled. Trip Computer See General Information (page 93). 88 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster Battery WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) It will illuminate when you switch this feature off or in conjunction E151262 with a message. See Blind Spot Information System (page 207). See Information Messages (page 102). Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start your vehicle. Brake System Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) The speed control system indicator light changes color to E144524 indicate what mode the system is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 194). E144522 If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked immediately by your authorized dealer. On (white light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off. Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged. WARNING Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury. Anti-Lock Braking System If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking system (without ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer. Cruise Control It will illuminate when you switch this feature on. Auto Start-stop (If Equipped) E71340 It will illuminate to inform you when the engine shuts down or in conjunction with a message. 89 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing It will illuminate when you engage the parking brake with the ignition on. Instrument Cluster Direction Indicator Front Airbag Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 274). If it fails to illuminate when you start your vehicle, continues to flash or remains on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer. Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped) Door Ajar It will illuminate when you switch the front fog lamps on. Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed. Grade Assist (If Equipped) Electric Park Brake E146190 It will illuminate when the electric parking brake has a malfunction. E144523 Lights when you switch on the grade assist function. Heads Up Display (If Equipped) Engine Coolant Temperature A red beam of lights will illuminate on the windshield in E156133 certain instances when using adaptive cruise control and/or the collision warning system. It will also illuminate momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works. Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Engine Oil High Beam If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). It will illuminate when you switch the high beam headlamps on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher. Hood Ajar Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. E159324 Fasten Seatbelt Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped) It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten your seatbelt. See Seatbelt Reminder (page 35). Illuminates when the lane keeping system is activated. E144813 90 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Displays when the ignition is on and the hood is not completely closed. Instrument Cluster Low Fuel Level If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately. It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty. Refuel as soon as possible. WARNING Low Tire Pressure Warning Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tire pressure as soon as possible. It will also illuminate momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by your authorized dealer. The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Parking Lamps Normally, the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See Emission Control System (page 160). It will illuminate when you switch the parking lamps on. Powertrain Fault Illuminates when a powertrain or an AWD fault has been detected. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Sport Mode Illuminates when you switch the sport mode on. Service Engine Soon E176099 If the service engine soon indicator light stays illuminated after the engine is started, it indicates that the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emissions control system. Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more information about having your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control System (page 160). Stability Control It will flash when the system is active. If it remains illuminated E138639 or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction the system will switch off. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. See Using Stability Control (page 180). 91 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Instrument Cluster Stability Control Off It will illuminate when you switch the system off. It will go out E130458 when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. See Using Stability Control (page 180). Trunk Ajar E159323 Displays when the ignition is on and the trunk is not completely closed. AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Keyless Warning Alert The horn will sound twice when you exit your vehicle with the intelligent access key and your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is still on. Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. 92 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Information Display Controls (Type 1 and Type 2) GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E144637 • Note: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with all the messages listed in this chapter. Your vehicle will not display messages of systems it is not equipped with. • • Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display. • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button). Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. Menu You can access the menu using the information display control. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Trip 1 and 2 Distance to E Trip Odometer Trip Timer Fuel Used 93 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Trip 1 and 2 Average Fuel Outside Temperature All Values 1 • • • • • • • 1 Type 2 Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys. Trip Timer — The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you restart your vehicle. Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip. Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. Outside Temperature — Shows the outside air temperature. All Values — Shows the Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average Fuel. Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time and fuel information. Fuel Economy Distance to Empty Inst Fuel Econ Avg MPG 1 Long Term Fuel Economy Fuel History 1 Average Fuel 94 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Fuel Economy All Values 1 Auto StartStop 1 • • • • • • • Type 2 Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along with your Avg MPG since the function was last reset. Long Term Fuel Economy - Shows your long term fuel economy. Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history. Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. All Values — Shows all fuel economy values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel). Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 102). Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Driver Assist Traction Ctrl - check enabled or uncheck disabled Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled 1 Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled Cruise Control Driver Alert 1 Adaptive or Normal 1 Driver Alert or Driver Alert Display 1 Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled Intelligent AWD 1 Lane Keeping System 1 Pre-Collision Mode Alert, Aid or Both Intensity High, Normal or Low Alert Sensitivity High, Normal or Low Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck disabled 95 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Driver Assist Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled Tire Monitor 1 Tire Pressure Type 2 Settings Vehicle Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled Lighting Autolamp delay Off or XX Seconds Locks Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabled Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled Remote Unlock All Doors or Driver's Door Switches inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled Oil Life Rest oil Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Remote Start Climate Control Auto or Last Settings Driver Seat or Seats and Wheel Automatic or Off Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes System - check enabled or uncheck disabled Windows Remote Open or Remote Close MyKey Wipers Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Always On or User Selectable Do Not Disturb On or Off 96 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Settings Traction Control Always On or User Selectable Max Speed Choose desired speed or Off Speed Minder Choose desired speed or Off Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled Clear MyKeys Display Setup Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L Temper- Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C) ature Tire Pres- psi, kPa or bar sure Language Choose your applicable setting 1 Type 2 • Information Display Controls (Type 3) • • Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button). Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. Main menu From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you can choose from the following categories: • • • • • E144638 • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. 97 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Display Mode Trip 1 & 2 Fuel Economy Driver Assist Settings Information Displays Scroll up or down to highlight one of the categories, then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu. Display mode Display Mode Use the up/down arrow buttons to choose between the following display options. Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 XXX mi (km) to empty X X - - Fuel gauge X X X X Round tachometer - - X X Vertical tachometer - X - - Engine coolant temp gauge - - - X Intelligent AWD - AWD Gauge • • • • XXX mi (km) to empty: Shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel. Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. When the fuel level becomes low, the level indicator will change to amber. When the fuel level becomes critically low, the level indicator will change to red. Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel warnings will display earlier. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Round tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. During SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gear will appear in the display. Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Trip 1 & 2 You can access the menu using the information display control. 98 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Trip 1 and 2 All Values All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel). • • • Trip Odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance. Trip Timer— The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you restart your vehicle. Average Fuel — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip. Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Fuel Economy Use the left and right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display. Fuel Economy Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset Fuel History Average Speed - Hold OK to Reset Auto StartStop • • • • Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy, average fuel economy and distance to empty. Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history from the past 30 min, average fuel economy and distance to empty. Average Speed - shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset. Auto StartStop - available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 102). Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Driver Assist In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. 99 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Driver Assist Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled Adaptive Steering Steering in D Sport or Normal Steering in S Sport or Normal Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled Cruise Control Adaptive or Normal Driver Alert Driver Alert or Driver Alert Display Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled Lane Keeping System Pre-Collision Mode Alert, Aid or Both Intensity High, Normal or Low Alert Sensitivity High, Normal or Low Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck disabled Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled Tire Monitor Tire Monitor - Hold OK to Reset Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Settings In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Settings Vehicle Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled Lighting Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabled Autolamp Delay Off or XX Seconds Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled Locks Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabled 100 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Settings Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled Remote Unlock All Doors or Driver First Switch Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled Mirrors Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabled Oil Life Rest XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Remote Start Climate Control Auto or Last setting Seats or Seats and Wheel Auto or Off Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes System - check enabled or uncheck disabled Seatbelts Windows Remote Open or Remote Close MyKey Wipers Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Always On or User Selectable Do Not Disturb On or Off Traction Control Always On or User Selectable Max Speed Choose desired speed or Off Speed Minder Choose desired speed or Off Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys 101 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Settings Display Setup Distance Miles & Gallons, l/100km or km/l Gauge Display Fuel Gauge or Fuel + Tach Temper- °Fahrenheit or °Celsius ature Tire Pres- psi, kPa or bar sure Language Choose your applicable setting INFORMATION MESSAGES Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have. E144636 Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus. Active Park Message Action Active Park Fault The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 102 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Adaptive Cruise Control Message Action Adaptive Cruise Malfunction A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 195). Adaptive Cruise Not Available A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 195). Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 195). Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking Turned Off The system has disabled the automatic braking. Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver. Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to Activate Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise. Adaptive Cruise Shift Down The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower gear. AdvanceTrac® Message Action Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. AdvanceTrac Off On The traction control has been switch on or off. 103 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Airbag Message Action Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove Objects Near Passenger Seat The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. Remove blockage. Alarm Message Action Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle. Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 66). Auto Start-Stop Message Action Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to start. Auto StartStop Press The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder Brake Harder to Activate to start. Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start Engine The engine needs to be restarted, press any pedal to start. Auto StartStop Shift to P, then Restart Engine Select park for the system to restart the engine. Auto StartStop Manual Restart Required The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required. Auto StartStop Not Available Displays when conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop system to function properly. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 151). Engine Stopped StartStop has shut off the engine automatically. Engine Starting StartStop is starting the engine automatically. Engine On due to Vehicle The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being Maneuvering turned. 104 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Message Action Engine On due to The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being Steering Wheel Maneuvturned. ering Engine On due to Accessory Usage Engine may be on to support high demand for electrical accessories, such as operating power windows, rear defroster, or when using the power point. Engine On Normal Operation Engine is on to support normal vehicle operation. Includes external vehicle conditions, such as altitude, traffic, low ambient temperature. Also includes battery outside optimal operating conditions (state of charge and temperature), and inadequate brake vacuum (can occur if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession). Engine On due to Low Temperature Engine is on in order to increase the engine temperature to an acceptable level. Engine On due to Outside Air Temp Engine is on to support normal vehicle operation due to low outside ambient temperature. Engine On due to Engine Engine is on in order to increase the engine temperature to an Warming acceptable level. Engine On due to Selected Gear Engine is on due to a low gear selection by the transmission. Engine On due to Steep Grade Engine is on due to a steep road grade. Engine On due to Key not Detected Engine is on due to no key being detected by the vehicle. Engine On due to Driver Door Opened Engine is on due to the driver door being opened. Engine On due to Driver Belt Unbuckled Engine is on due to the driver seat belt being unbuckled. Engine On due to Heating /Cooling Engine is on to achieve or maintain interior compartment at an acceptable level. Engine On due to Power Engine is on, which is required to support the use of the power Outlet in Use outlet (110V). Engine On due to Vehicle Engine is on due to the vehicle battery needing to be charged. Charging Deactivated by Driver You have disabled the Start Stop feature. 105 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Automatic Engine Shutdown Message Action Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut off:#0} Seconds The engine is getting ready to shut off. Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy. Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut off:#0} Seconds Press Ok to Override The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shut down. All-Wheel Drive Message Action AWD Temporarily Disabled The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating. AWD OFF The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare tire. AWD Restored The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools. AWD Malfunction Service Required The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 106 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Battery and Charging System Message Action Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal. Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as Battery possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery. Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Message Action Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 207). Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 207). Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 207). Cross Traffic System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 107 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Doors and Locks Message Action X Door Ajar The door(s) listed is not completely closed. Trunk Ajar The luggage compartment is not completely closed. Hood Ajar The hood is not completely closed. Switches Inhibited Security Mode The system has disabled the door switches. Factory Keypad Code {X X X X X} The factory keypad code displays in the information display after system resets the keypad. Driver Alert Message Action Driver Alert Warning Rest Now Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so. Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested Take a rest soon. Fuel Message Action Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition. Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed. Hill Start Assist Message Action Hill Start Assist Not Available Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 176). 108 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle. No Key Detected The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page 146). Restart Now or Key is Needed You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engine and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key inside your vehicle. Accessory Power is Active Your vehicle is in the run ignition state. Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact an authorized dealer for service. Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system. Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system. Max Number of Keys Learned You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system. Not Enough Keys Learned You have not programmed enough keys to the system. Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible. Soon Could Not Program Integrated Key An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing keys. Vehicle is ON A reminder that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on. 109 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Lane Keeping System Message Action Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable. Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires the windility Clean Screen shield to be cleaned to operate properly. Front Camera Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering Wheel wheel. Maintenance Message Action Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). Oil Change Required The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, inspect the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268). Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Engine Coolant Over Temperature The engine coolant temperature is excessively high. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). 110 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Message Action Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature. Transport / Factory Mode Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly. See an authorized dealer. See Manual The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction. MyKey Message Action MyKey not Created You cannot program a MyKey. MyKey Active Drive Safely MyKey is active. Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that the MyKey speed limit is on. Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h). Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey. Check Speed Drive Safely You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit. Buckle Up to Unmute Audio The belt-minder turns on with a MyKey in use. AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on. Traction Control On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on. MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on. Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on. 111 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Park Aid Message Action Check Front Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 181). Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 181). Front Park Aid On Off Front park aid status. Rear Park Aid On Off Rear park aid status. Park Brake Message Action To Release: Press Brake and Switch The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal being pressed. Park Brake Use Switch to Release The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual release. Release Park Brake The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving. Park Brake Not Applied The electric parking brake is not fully applied. Park Brake Not Released The electric parking brake is not fully released. Park Brake Maintenance The electric parking brake system has been put into a special Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Limited Function Service Required The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality may still be available. See an authorized dealer. Park Brake Malfunction Service Now The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer. Park Brake System Overheated Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system. Wait 2 minutes before attempting to apply again. 112 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Power Steering Message Action Steering Fault Service Now The power steering system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Loss Stop Safely The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Assist Fault Service Required The power steering system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Pre-Collision Assist Message Action Pre-Collision Assist Malfunction There is a system malfunction with the pre-collision assist system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor Blocked The pre-collision assist system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice, mud, water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Pre-Collision Assist Not Available There is a system malfunction with the pre-collision assist system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Remote Start Message Action To Drive: Turn Key to On A reminder to turn the key on to drive your vehicle after a remote start. To Drive: Press Brake and Start Button A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button to drive your vehicle after a remote start. 113 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Seats Message Action Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving. Permitted While Driving Memory {0} Saved Shows where you have saved your memory setting. Starting System Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle. Engine Start Pending Please Wait The starter is attempting to start your vehicle. Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start. Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action Tire Pressure Low One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 309). Tire Pressure Monitor Fault The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 309). Tire Pressure Sensor Fault A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 309). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 114 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Traction Control Message Action Traction Control Off / Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched it off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 178). Spinout Detected Hazards Activated A spinout has occurred and the hazards are on. Transmission Message Action Transmission Malfunction Service Now Contact an authorized dealer. Transmission Overheating Stop Safely The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it is possible. Transmission Over Temperature Stop Safely The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it is possible. Transmission Service Required Contact an authorized dealer. Transmission Too Hot Press Brake Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool. Transmission Limited Function See Manual The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized dealer. Transmission Warming Up Please Wait Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive. Transmission Not in Park A reminder to shift into park. Press Brake Pedal You need to depress the brake pedal. Select S to confirm Stay Displays when a button needs to be pressed again to enter in Neutral Mode neutral hold. See Automatic Transmission (page 163). Select L to Confirm Stay in Neutral Mode Transmission Adjusted The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy. 115 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Information Displays Message Action Transmission AdaptMode The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy. Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On The transmission is locked and unable to select gears. Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears. 116 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped) E144491 A Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. B A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off. C Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. D Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125). E Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. F MAX Defrost: Adjust the control to turn on defrost. Outside air flows through the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost. Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. 117 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control G MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. H Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents. Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates on when the system is on. I Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 134). J Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency. K Fan speed indicator: Illuminates to indicate fan speed. 118 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITHOUT: SONY AUDIO SYSTEM E198922 A Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 134). B Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. C Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. D A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off. 119 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control E Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the passenger side. F Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 135). G MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. H Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency. I AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds. J Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. K Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125). L MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost. Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. M Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the driver side. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AUDIO SYSTEM Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your SYNC information. 120 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control E225754 A A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off. B MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. C Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency. D Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. 121 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control E Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 134). F Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 135). G Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side. H Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. I Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. J Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125). K Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. L MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost. Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. M AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds. Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. General Hints WARNING Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. If the windows fog up, follow the settings for demisting the windshield. Note: To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. 122 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control Manual Climate Control Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside temperatures, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up. Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside temperatures, or when the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. When the interior reaches the selected temperature, the system automatically switches to using outside air. Automatic Climate Control Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open. Heating the Interior Quickly Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to a high speed setting. Press the AUTO button. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the full heat setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 3 Select the footwell air vents using the air distribution buttons. Recommended Settings for Heating Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press the AUTO button. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Select the footwell air vents using the air distribution buttons. 123 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control Cooling the Interior Quickly Vehicle with manual climate control 1 Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A/C position. 2 Drive with the windows fully open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Vehicle with automatic climate control Press the MAX A/C button. Recommended Settings for Cooling Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press the AUTO button. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Select the instrument panel air vents using the air distribution buttons. Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control 1 Select the windshield air vents using the Press the defrost button. air distribution buttons. 2 Press the A/C button if the indicator is off. 3 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 4 Adjust the fan speed to a high speed setting. 124 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. Climate Control You can locate the cabin air filter behind the glove box. HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system. Heated Rear Window Note: Make sure the engine is running before operating the heated windows. Press the button to clear the heated rear window of thin ice E184884 and fog. The heated rear window will automatically turn off after a short period of time. Start the engine before you switch the heated rear window on. Replace the filter at regular intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. REMOTE START (If Equipped) The remote start feature allows you to pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The climate control system works to achieve comfort according to your previous settings. Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped) When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors will automatically turn on. Note: You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation. Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can now make adjustments normally, but you need to turn certain vehicle-dependent features back on, such as: • Heated seats. • Cooled seats. • Heated steering wheel. • Heated mirrors. • Heated rear window. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. CABIN AIR FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits: • It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration. • It improves the interior compartment cleanliness. • It protects the climate control components from particle deposits. You can adjust the default remote start settings using the information display controls. See Information Displays (page 93). 125 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Climate Control Automatic Settings In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information display). In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated seats do not automatically turn on. In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information display). The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on. 126 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees. • Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. • Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. • Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNINGS Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a crash. Do not place objects higher than the seatback to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a crash or during heavy braking. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. E68595 When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash. The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. 127 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats The head restraints consist of: WARNINGS Install the head restraint properly to help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. Adjusting the Head Restraint Raising the Head Restraint Front seat and rear seat outboard head restraints Pull the head restraint up. Lowering the Head Restraint 1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. Removing the Head Restraint 1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position. 2. Press and hold buttons C and D. 3. Pull the head restraint up. E138642 Installing the Head Restraint Rear center head restraint Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. Tilting Head Restraints The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following: E138645 128 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats The driver and passenger manual seats may consist of: E144631 A B C D E144727 1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position. After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward again will then release it to the rearward, un-tilted position. MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped) A bar to move the seat backward and forward. B A control to adjust the lumbar of the seatback (driver seat only). C A lever to adjust the height of the seat (driver seat only). D A lever to adjust the angle of the seatback. POWER SEATS (If Equipped) WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged. Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat's safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash. Note: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. 129 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Seats 6-way power seat E176793 130 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats 10-way power seat E144632 Power Lumbar (If Equipped) MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped) WARNINGS Before activating the seat memory, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts. Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving. This feature automatically recalls the position of the following features: E165608 131 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats • • • Driver seat. Power mirrors. Power steering column. You can also recall a preset memory position by: • Pressing the unlock button on your intelligent access key fob if it is linked to a preset position. • Unlocking the intelligent driver door handle if a linked key fob is present. • Entering a personal entry code on the Securicode keypad. See Locks (page 58). The memory control is on the driver door. Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your memory position when the ignition is off moves the seat to the Easy Entry position. E223340 Note: Pressing any active memory feature control - power seat, mirror, or steering column (or any memory button) during a memory recall cancels the operation. Saving a PreSet Position 1. Adjust the memory features to your desired position. 2. Press and hold the SET button until you hear a single tone. 3. Press the desired preset button until you hear a single tone. Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob Your vehicle can save the preset memory positions for up to two remote controls or intelligent access (IA) keys. You can save up to two preset memory positions. You can save a memory preset at any time. After you have saved your desired memory preset positions: Recalling a PreSet Position 1. Press and hold the desired preset button for about three seconds until you hear a single tone. 2. Within three seconds, press the lock button on the remote control you are linking. Press and release the preset button associated with your desired driving position. The memory features move to the position stored for that preset. Note: A preset memory position can only be recalled when the ignition is off, or when the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not moving. To unlink a remote control, follow the same procedure – except in step 2, press the unlock button on the remote control. Note: If more than one linked remote control or intelligent access key is in range, the memory function moves to the settings of the first key to initiate a memory recall. 132 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats Easy Entry and Exit Feature If you enable the easy entry and exit feature, it automatically moves the driver seat position rearward up to two inches (five centimeters) when you switch the ignition off. The driver seat will return to the previous position when you switch the ignition on. You can enable or disable this feature in the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). REAR SEATS Note: Your vehicle may have split seatbacks that you must fold individually. Note: Make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback. To lower the seat back(s) from inside the vehicle, do the following: E144634 1. Pull the handle to release the seatback. 2. Push the seatback forward. 133 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats HEATED SEATS (If Equipped) WARNING People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. • Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge. E164098 3. Stow the safety belt in the stowage clip. This will prevent the safety belt from getting caught in the seat latch. When raising the seat back(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into place. E146941 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights. 134 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If Equipped) Heated Seats Cooled Seats WARNING The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. E146309 To operate the cooled seats: Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various cooling settings and off. More indicator lights indicate cooler settings. If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself off. You will need to reactivate it. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. • Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge. Climate controlled seat air filter replacement Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air filters that are integrated with the seats. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. E146322 135 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Seats REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped) E144635 Fold the armrest down to use the armrest and cupholder. 136 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) HomeLink Wireless Control System WARNINGS Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage. E142657 Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor. The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. As well as being programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting. Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515. Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming. Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. In-Vehicle Programming This process is to program your hand-held transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink button. Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed. Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 137 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 – 4. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515. Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor E142658 1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, turn your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle. 2. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program. 3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator or garage door opener. See Gate Operator / Canadian Programming. Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener. E142659 1. Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps. 2. Return to your vehicle. 4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink indicator light. E142658 3. Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time. If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. No further action is needed. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. See Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor. 138 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) Gate Operator / Canadian Programming 1. Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly. 2. When the indicator lights flash, release the buttons. The codes for all buttons are erased. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Reprogramming a Single Button To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps: Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. 2. Release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons. 3. Continue programing HomeLink. See In-Vehicle Programming. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515. Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2 Garage Door Opener Erasing the Function Button Codes Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener. Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. Note: To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode. E142660 139 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from red to red and green. 2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly the indicator light will turn green. A Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor B Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor. E142661 A. Red indicator light B. Green indicator light 1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from green to red and green. 2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to programming mode. If done properly the indicator light will appear red. 3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) of the button on the visor you want to program. 4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter and the button you want to program. The indicator light on the visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful. Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter indicator light displays green and red, release the button until the indicator light turns off before pressing the button again. E142662 1. Press and hold the program button on the garage door opener motor until both blue indicator lights turn on. 2. Release the program button. Only the smaller round indicator light should be on. 3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple indicator light will flash. Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds. 4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple. Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully, the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this: 140 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the visor for 2 seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves. Programming is now complete. Clearing a HomeLink Device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. The indicator light will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the indicator light should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed. FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 141 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point Locations WARNINGS Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. Power points may be in the following locations: • On the front of the center console. • Inside the center console. • On the rear of the center console. 110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped) Do not use a power point for operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the power points can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury. Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 15 amps. If the power supply does not work after you switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on. Note: Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Note: The power point will turn off when the ignition is switched off or the battery voltage drops below 11 volts. Use the power point for powering electric devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on the rear of the center console. Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This will damage the power point and blow the fuse. Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the vehicle is not running. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods. E193395 Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power point may open to the right or upward. 142 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Auxiliary Power Points When the indicator light on the power point is: • On: The power point is working, the ignition is on and a device is plugged in. • Off: The power point is off, the ignition is off or no device is plugged in. • Flashing: The power point is in fault mode. The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on. Do not use the power point for certain electric devices, including: • Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. • Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools or compressor-driven refrigerators. • Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical equipment or measuring equipment. • Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch-sensor lamps. 143 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Storage Compartments Center Console with Rotary Control (If Equipped) CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped) Stow items in the cup holder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or crashes, including hot drinks which may spill. Available console features include: A B C E143942 A Cup holder. B Storage compartment with auxiliary power point and USB port. C Auxiliary power point. E222012 144 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Front storage compartment with USB ports and auxiliary power point. B Cup holder. C Storage compartment with auxiliary power point and media hub. D 110 volt AC power point. E Auxiliary power point. F Switch pack. Storage Compartments OVERHEAD CONSOLE E224352 Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. 145 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION KEYLESS STARTING WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Note: The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones. Note: A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine. Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. Ignition Modes Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. E144447 The keyless starting system has three modes: If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. Off: Turns the ignition off. • The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. Without applying the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal (automatic transmission), press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode, or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not moving. On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine. • Without applying the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal (automatic transmission), press and release the button once. Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may not start when the vehicle starts. 146 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine • Press the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal (automatic transmission), and then press the button for any length of time. An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition is on and when the engine starts. Note: You must have your intelligent access key in your vehicle to shift the transmission out of park (P). 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the push button ignition switch. Failure to Start The system does not function if: • The key frequencies are jammed. • The key battery has no charge. STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When you start the engine, the idle speed increases. This helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the following: 1. Note: You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds without the engine starting before the starting system temporarily disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once. For example, if you crank the engine three times for 20 seconds each time, without the engine starting, you reached the 60-second time limit. A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time. You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a 15-second engine cranking time. You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again. E155835 2. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the cup holder. With the buttons facing upward and the unlock button facing the front of your vehicle, place the first intelligent access key into the backup slot (B). 3. Press the push button ignition switch. Before starting your vehicle, check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their seatbelts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • Make sure the transmission is in park (P). If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Starting Your Vehicle Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 147 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Remove the key blade from the transmitter. Apply the parking brake. Fully depress the brake pedal. Shift into park (P). Fully press the accelerator pedal. Starting and Stopping the Engine 5. Briefly press the push button ignition switch. You can stop the shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the 30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following: • Interacting with your vehicle, for example pressing the brake or accelerator pedal. • You can temporarily switch off the shutdown any time the ignition is on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). • During the countdown before shutdown, you are prompted to press OK or RESET (depending on your type of information display) to temporarily switch the feature off (for the current ignition cycle only). Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching it off, even if it does not detect a valid passive key. Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off, press the brake pedal and press the push button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you can no longer start your vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive key. Once your vehicle starts, it remains running until you press the push button ignition switch, even if your vehicle does not detect a valid passive key. If you open and close a door while your vehicle is running, the system searches for a valid passive key. After 20 seconds, you can no longer start your vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive key. Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and all warning lamps and indicators will be turned off. Note: If your vehicle is left running for 30 minutes without any interaction, it automatically shuts down. Automatic Engine Shutdown This feature automatically shuts down your vehicle if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off to save battery power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that your vehicle has shut down to save fuel. Start your vehicle as normal. 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift into park (P). 3. Briefly press the push button ignition switch. Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the engine. Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown. When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle. 148 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine 1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P). 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Press and hold the push button ignition switch, or press it three times within two seconds. Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C). The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120-volt AC electrical source. Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation: • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. • Use as short an extension cord as possible. • Do not use multiple extension cords. • Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire. • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles. • Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. • Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes. • Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and then leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following: • Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm). • Set your climate control to outside air. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped) WARNINGS Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock. 149 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Using the Engine Block Heater The engine block heater plug is located in a housing in the left fog lamp bezel. Open the hinged, circular door and make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It will achieve maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. If you use the heater longer than three hours, this will not improve system performance and will use unnecessary electricity. 150 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unique Driving Characteristics • • • • • AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped) The system helps reduce fuel consumption by automatically shutting off and restarting the engine while your vehicle is stopped. The engine will restart automatically when you release the brake pedal. In some situations, your vehicle may restart automatically, for example: • • • • To maintain interior comfort To recharge the battery • Note: Power assist steering is turned off when the engine is off. • WARNINGS The engine may restart automatically if required by the system. • Switch the ignition off before opening the hood or performing any maintenance. Failure to do so may result in serious injuries due to automatic engine restart. • • Note: The system allows multiple successive Auto StartStop events, but it may not operate in conditions of heavy traffic or in extended low speed operation. Always switch the ignition off before leaving your vehicle, as the system may have turned the engine off, but the ignition will still be on and automatic restart may occur. The green Auto StartStop indicator light on the instrument cluster will illuminate to indicate when the automatic engine stop occurs. The Auto StartStop system status is available at a glance within the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). If the instrument cluster is equipped with a grey Auto StartStop indicator light, it is illuminated when automatic engine stop is not available due to one of the above noted conditions not being met. E146361 Enabling Auto StartStop The system is automatically enabled every time you start your vehicle if the following conditions are met: • • • Automatic Engine Restart The Auto StartStop button is not pressed (not illuminated). Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed of 3 mph (4 km/h) after the vehicle has been initially started. Your vehicle is stopped. Any of the following conditions will result in an automatic restart of the engine: • • 151 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Your foot is on the brake pedal. The transmission is in drive (D). The driver's door is closed. There is adequate brake vacuum. The interior compartment has been cooled or warmed to an acceptable level. The front windshield defroster is off. The steering wheel is not turned rapidly or is not at a sharp angle. The vehicle is not on a steep road grade. The battery is within optimal operating conditions (battery state of charge and temperature in range). The engine coolant is at operating temperature. Elevation is below approximately 10000 feet (3048 meters). Ambient temperature is moderate. Your foot is removed from the brake pedal. You press the accelerator pedal. Unique Driving Characteristics • • • • • • • • • • Disabling Auto StartStop You press the accelerator and the brake pedal at the same time. The driver safety belt becomes unfastened or the driver door is ajar. The transmission is moved from drive (D). Your vehicle is moving. The interior compartment does not meet customer comfort when air conditioning or heat is on. Fogging of the windows could occur and the air conditioning is on. The battery is not within optimal operating conditions. The maximum engine off time is exceeded. When you press the Auto StartStop button while the engine is stopped automatically. The heated windshield is turned on. E221544 Press the Auto StartStop button located on the center console to switch the system off. The button will illuminate. The system will only be deactivated for the current ignition cycle. Press the button again to restore Auto StartStop function. Any of the following conditions may result in an automatic restart of the engine: • • The blower fan speed is increased or the climate control temperature is changed. An electrical accessory is turned on or plugged in. If your vehicle is in an Auto StartStop state and you shift the transmission to reverse while the brake is not depressed, a message telling you to press the brake will appear. You must press the brake pedal within 10 seconds, or a shift to park and a manual restart will be required. Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine message appears and the amber Auto StartStop indicator light is flashing, automatic restart is not available. The vehicle must be restarted manually. See Information Displays (page 93). 152 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • Fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. • Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container. Fuel may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. • When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. • Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. • Always turn off the vehicle before refueling. 153 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors could cause an adverse reaction, serious personal injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash the affected areas immediately with plenty of soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience any adverse reactions. Fuel and Refueling • FUEL QUALITY Choosing the Right Fuel • The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. E161513 Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. We recommend regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. We do not recommend fuels with an octane rating below 87. FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to provide improved performance, we recommend premium fuel for severe duty usage such as trailer tow. The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage compartment floor covering. Do not use any fuel other than those recommended because they could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended can impair the emission control system and cause a loss of vehicle performance. Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. 154 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is prohibited by law). Fuel and Refueling 4-Door - Vehicles with full size spare wheel and 4-Door or 5-Door - Vehicles with Temporary Mobility Kit 5-Door - Vehicles with full size spare wheel E217477 E162864 155 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Wagon - Vehicles with Temporary Mobility Kit Wagon - Vehicles with full size spare wheel E185369 E197588 RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Running out of fuel can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. If your vehicle runs out of fuel: • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine. If your vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel may be required. • You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal. 156 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Filling a Portable Fuel Container 1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages and remove the fuel tank filler cap. Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a fuel tank filler cap. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it. • Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it. • Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position. 2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel tank filler pipe opening. Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container WARNINGS Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel system filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground. E157452 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container. 4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel tank filler pipe opening. 5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close the fuel tank filler door. 6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back in your vehicle or properly dispose of it. Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel. Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the plastic funnel included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 154). REFUELING WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following: 157 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling WARNINGS Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. B C D E206911 Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. Stop refueling when the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. 1. Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler cap. 158 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A A Type 1: Left hand side - press the fuel tank filler door to open it. B Type 1: Right hand side - press the fuel tank filler door to open it. C Type 2: Left hand side - pull the fuel tank filler door to open it. D Type 2: Right hand side - pull the fuel tank filler door to open it. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages. Fuel and Refueling A B A E206912 4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown. E139202 Note: When you insert the correct size fuel pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will open. E119081 5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and then slowly remove it. 6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door. Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle checked immediately. 2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe opening. A FUEL CONSUMPTION E139203 Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. B 3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower position B when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in the higher position A may affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full. 159 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Empty reserve is the amount of fuel remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for driving. The usable capacity of the fuel tank is the amount of fuel that can be put into the tank after the gauge indicates empty. The advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size – it is the combined usable capacity plus the empty reserve. 5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used (For Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled). Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy. Filling the Tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: • • • Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running. Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high) each time the tank is filled. Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNINGS Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Calculating Fuel Economy Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy. Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter that will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading. 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added. 3. After at least three to five tank fill ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Avoid running out of fuel. 160 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling • • On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule. Your vehicle has a computer known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine’s emission control system. The system protects the environment by making sure that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists a service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are: If you use anything other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed properly. See Refueling (page 157). 4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet. Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately. You can correct these temporary malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time you start the engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city and highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement. Please consult your warranty information for complete details. 161 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuel and Refueling If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs. The OBD-II system checks the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you can perform the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving: 1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods. 2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight hours with the ignition off. Then, start the vehicle and complete the above driving cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the vehicle until the above driving cycle is complete. Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing Some state and provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you need to repeat the above driving cycle. If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, your vehicle may need service. See On-Board Diagnostics. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is ready for I/M testing. 162 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Park (P) WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure you shift the gearshift lever to park (P). Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle locks the transmission and prevents the wheels from turning. Always come to a complete stop before putting your vehicle into and out of park (P). An audible chime sounds once you select park (P). Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than a few seconds will limit engine rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury. When the ignition is turned off, your vehicle will automatically shift into park (P). If the ignition is turned off while the vehicle is moving, it will first shift into neutral (N) until a slow enough speed is reached. Your vehicle will then shift into park (P) automatically. Automatic Return to Park Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission Note: This feature will not operate when your vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or neutral tow. Putting your vehicle in gear: Your vehicle has a safety feature that will automatically shift your vehicle into park (P) when any of the following conditions occur: • You turn the vehicle off. • You open the driver's door with your safety belt unlatched. • Your safety belt is unlatched while the driver's door is open. If you turn your vehicle off while moving, your vehicle will first shift into neutral (N) until it slows down enough to shift into park (P) automatically. E222981 1. 2. 3. 4. Fully press down the brake pedal. Move the selector to the desired gear. Come to a complete stop. Move the selector to park (P). Note: If you have waited an extended period of time (2-15 minutes) before starting your vehicle, unlatching your safety belt will cause this feature to activate, even with the driver's door closed. Note: This feature may not work properly if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your door ajar indicator does not illuminate when you open the driver’s door or the indicator illuminates with the driver’s door closed, see your authorized dealer. 163 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Transmission Grade Assist Reverse (R) With the selector in reverse (R), your vehicle moves backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R). Neutral (N) With the selector in neutral (N), your vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. Stay in Neutral Mode E224429 Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in Neutral mode when entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do this could result in vehicle damage not covered by warranty. Press the grade assist button to activate grade assist. The grade assist lamp will appear in the instrument cluster. Press the button again to switch the system off. Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to stay in neutral when you exit your vehicle. Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this mode. Grade assist: • Provides additional grade braking with a combination of engine motoring and high-voltage battery charging to help maintain vehicle speed when descending a grade. • As your vehicle determines the amount of engine motoring and high-voltage battery charging, you may notice the engine speed increasing and decreasing to help maintain your vehicle speed when descending a grade. • The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated. To enter Stay in Neutral mode: • Move the transmission selector to neutral (N). • A message will appear in your information display screen prompting you to press the sport (S) button. • Press the sport (S) button again to enter Stay in Neutral mode. To exit Stay in Neutral mode, select a different gear. A message will appear in your information display screen when your vehicle has entered Stay in Neutral mode. Drive (D) Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through six. 164 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Transmission Sport (S) Putting the vehicle in sport (S): • Provides additional engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This will increase engine RPM during engine braking. • Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy. • Provides gear selection more quickly and at higher engine speeds. E144821 SelectShift in drive (D): • Provides a temporary manual mode for performing more demanding maneuvers where extra control of gear selection is required (for example, when towing or overtaking). This mode will hold a selected gear for a temporary period of time dependent on driver inputs (for example, steering or accelerator pedal input). SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission (If Equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic transmission. The SelectShift Automatic transmission gives you the ability to change gears up or down (without a clutch) as desired. SelectShift in sport (S): • Provides a permanent manual gear selection where full control of gear selection is required. In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which may cause it to stall, SelectShift still automatically makes some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. Although SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time as long as the SelectShift determines that damage will not be caused to the engine from over-revving. To exit SelectShift mode shift the transmission into another gear (for example, drive [D]). Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following chart: Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: Note: Engine damage may occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting. SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button. Pull the + paddle on the steering wheel to activate SelectShift. • • Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift. Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift. 165 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing 1-2 15 mph (24 km/h) 2-3 25 mph (40 km/h) 3-4 40 mph (64 km/h) 4-5 45 mph (72 km/h) 5-6 50 mph (80 km/h) Transmission Note: This feature will only function if your 12-volt battery has power. If vehicle battery voltage is not sufficient, an external 12-volt power source (for example, jumper cables, battery charger or jump pack) may be required to function the interlock override switch. The instrument cluster displays your currently selected gear. If a gear is requested but not available due to vehicle conditions (low speed, too high engine speed for requested gear selection), the current gear will flash three times. Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the transmission automatically downshifts for maximum performance. Use the brake-shift interlock override to move your transmission from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction. If your vehicle has a dead battery, an external power source will be required. Note: In low traction conditions, you can pull away in second gear using SelectShift. To perform this operation, select drive (D) or sport (S) mode and press the + toggle (if equipped) or pull the + paddle (if equipped) until 2 is displayed on the cluster. Your vehicle is now ready to move in 2nd gear. 1. Apply the parking brake and turn your ignition off before performing this procedure. Brake-Shift Interlock Override WARNINGS Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working. When doing this procedure, you need to take the transmission out of park (P) which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate. E180636 2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access slot. The slot is located in your center console storage bin. The access slot does not have a label. Note: Make sure that you correctly identify the access hole as not to damage the media hub. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used. 3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake shift interlock switch. The shift buttons on the instrument panel will flash when your vehicle is in override mode. 4. With the override switch still held, press the neutral button (N) to shift from park. 5. Release the override button. Note: For some markets this feature is disabled. 166 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Transmission 6. Your vehicle will remain in Stay in Neutral mode for wrecker towing purposes or can be shifted to the desired gear and driven (if possible). 7. Release the parking brake. Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning This feature may increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal and does not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process fully updates transmission operation. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, you may rock it out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 167 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Do not use a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided. If the mini-spare tire is installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This condition will be indicated by a warning in the information display See Information Messages (page 102). If there is a warning message in the information display from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on. It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD system. USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator. Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty. Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display when an AWD system fault is present See Information Messages (page 102). An AWD system fault will cause the AWD system to default to front-wheel drive only mode. When this warning message is displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway. Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine. Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display if the AWD system has overheated See Information Messages (page 102). This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes. After the engine has been restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled, the warning message will turn off and normal AWD function will return. Basic operating principles in special conditions • • 168 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement • • • Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle. Emergency Maneuvers • If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the transmission is in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock position or turn the vehicle off using the start/stop button and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer. • Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. • Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. 169 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid "over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel. In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs. All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Sand Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. After the system has cooled down, normal AWD function will return. Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rear axle serviced by an authorized dealer. Mud and Water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. E143950 “Tread Lightly” is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.” E142667 170 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral; instead, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down. Driving on Snow and Ice WARNING When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause driveline damage. AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. E143949 171 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 173). Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lowering kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control. Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks). Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway usage. 172 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brakes Brake Assist GENERAL INFORMATION Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal, and can reduce stopping distances in critical situations. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, have it checked by an authorized dealer. Anti-lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels (page 283). This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the system may be disabled. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective. Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps may flash during heavy braking. Following this, your hazard lights may also flash when your vehicle comes to a stop. E144522 If the brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the E144522 parking brake, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 89). Brake Over Accelerator Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal may pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move the transmission to park (P), switch the engine off and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for any interference. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer. The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when: • You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. • Your vehicle is hydroplaning. • You take corners too fast. • The road surface is poor. 173 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brakes ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE WARNINGS Applying the electric parking brake while moving will result in use of the anti-lock braking system. Do not use the electric parking brake system when the vehicle is moving unless the normal brake system is unable to stop the vehicle. The electric parking brake replaces the conventional handbrake. The operating switch is located in the center console. WARNING Always set the parking brake and leave your vehicle with the transmission in park (P) (automatic transmission) or in first gear (1) or reverse (R) (manual transmission). With the exception of emergency conditions (for example, the brake pedal does not work or is blocked), do not apply the electric parking brake while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road surfaces or weather conditions, emergency braking can cause the vehicle to skid out of control or off the road. Note: When you apply the electric parking brake in certain conditions, for example, on a steep hill, the electric parking brake may reapply the brakes within three to ten minutes. Note: The brake system warning lamp will illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition is turned off after the electric parking brake has been applied, or the electric parking brake has been applied after the ignition has been turned off. Note: You may notice various noises when you apply and release the electric parking brake. This is normal and no cause for concern. Note: The electric parking brake will not automatically apply. You must apply the electric parking brake using the electric parking brake switch. Parking On a Hill (Vehicles With a Manual Transmission) If you park your vehicle facing uphill, move the transmission to first gear (1) and turn the steering wheel away from the curb. If you park your vehicle facing downhill, move the transmission to reverse (R) and turn the steering wheel toward the curb. Applying the Electric Parking brake WARNINGS The brake system warning lamp will flash during an electric parking brake apply. If the brake system warning lamp continues to flash, there could be a problem with your electric parking brake. E227395 Pull the switch up to apply the electric parking brake. 174 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brakes The brake system warning lamp will flash for approximately 2 seconds and then illuminate to confirm that the electric parking brake has been applied. See Information Displays (page 93). You can manually release the electric parking brake by: 1. Turning the ignition on. 2. Pressing the brake pedal. 3. Pressing the electric parking brake switch. If you apply the electric parking brake when your vehicle is moving, the brake system warning lamp will illuminate and a warning chime will sound. See Information Displays (page 93). When the electric parking brake is released, the brake system warning lamp will turn off. If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph (6 km/h), the braking force is applied as long as the switch is pulled. Releasing or pressing the switch or pressing the accelerator pedal will stop the braking force. Automatic release - drive away release Your vehicle will automatically release the parking brake if all of the following conditions exist: • The driver door is closed. • The accelerator pedal is pressed. • There are no faults detected in the parking brake system. Releasing the Electric Parking Brake You can release the electric parking brake either manually by pressing the switch or automatically. Note: If the electric parking brake warning lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking brake will not automatically release. You must release the electric parking brake using the electric parking brake switch. Manual release WARNING Note: On manual transmission vehicles, if the transmission is in neutral (N) when you release the clutch pedal and press the accelerator pedal, the electric parking brake will release automatically. If the brake system warning light remains illuminated or flashes after you have released the parking brake, there could be a problem with you braking system. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: On manual transmission vehicles, you must fully press the clutch pedal before the drive away release feature will operate. Drive as normal using the accelerator and clutch pedals and the electric parking brake will be automatically released. The brake system warning lamp will go off to confirm that the electric parking brake has been released. E227515 175 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brakes Note: The electric parking brake drive away release makes starting on a hill easier. This feature will release the parking brake automatically when the vehicle has sufficient drive force to move up the hill. To assure drive away release when starting uphill, press the accelerator pedal quickly. WARNINGS During all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. If the engine is revved excessively, or if a malfunction is detected, the system will be deactivated. Driving with a Trailer Depending on the slope and the weight of the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll backwards slightly when you start on a slope. The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. When the system is active, your vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The brakes release automatically when the engine has sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the grade. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space. To prevent this from happening, do the following: 1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this position. 2. Drive your vehicle, then release the switch when you notice that the engine has developed sufficient driving force. Battery With No Charge WARNING You will not be able to apply or release the electric parking brake if the battery is low or has no charge. The system will activate automatically on any slope that will cause significant vehicle rollback. For vehicles with a manual transmission, you can switch this feature off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 93). The system will remain on or off depending on how it was last set. If the battery is low or has no charge, use jumper cables and a booster battery. HILL START ASSIST Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate the system is either on or off. WARNINGS The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into park (P) (automatic transmission) or first gear (1) (manual transmission). Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available while Auto Hold is active. Using Hill Start Assist 1. You must remain in your vehicle once you have activated the system. 176 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Bring your vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed and select an uphill gear (for example, first (1) when facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing downhill). Brakes 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system will activate automatically. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for about two or three seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will release automatically. Switching the System On and Off You can switch this feature on or off if your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission and an information display. See General Information (page 93). The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual transmission and an information display, you cannot turn the system on or off. When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on. 177 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Traction Control Using the Information Display Controls PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. You can switch this feature off or on in the information display. See General Information (page 93). If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction. Using a Switch (If Equipped) Use the traction control switch on the instrument panel to switch the system off or on. System Indicator Lights and Messages USING TRACTION CONTROL The stability and traction control light: WARNING The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the information display controls or the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. E138639 • • • The stability and traction control off light temporarily illuminates E130458 on engine start-up and stays on when you switch the traction control system off. The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active. Switching the System Off When you switch the system off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status. You can switch the system off by either using the information display controls or the switch. 178 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Temporarily illuminates on engine start-up. Flashes when a driving condition activates either of the systems. Illuminates if a problem occurs in either of the systems. Stability Control If a fault occurs in either the stability control or the traction control system, you may experience the following conditions: PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. • • If a driving condition activates either the stability control or the traction control system you may experience the following conditions: • • • • • • Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN. The stability and traction control light flashes. Your vehicle slows down. Reduced engine power. A vibration in the brake pedal. The brake pedal is stiffer than usual. If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal may move as the system applies higher brake force. The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle: Electronic Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power. Traction Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Using Traction Control (page 178). The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. 179 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily. The stability control and traction control systems do not enhance your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of the wheels. Stability Control B B B A A B A E72903 A Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface. USING STABILITY CONTROL The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. You cannot switch the stability control system off, but when you shift into reverse (R), the system deactivates. You can switch the traction control system off or on. See Using Stability Control (page 180). 180 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids Note: The sensing system cannot be turned off when a MyKey is present. See Principle of Operation (page 54). PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed) objects when moving on a flat surface at parking speeds. Certain objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. Note: If you attach certain add-on devices such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing system may detect that add-on device and therefore provide warnings. It is suggested that you disable the rear sensing system when you attach an add-on device to your vehicle to prevent these warnings. The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. You can turn the system on or off by pressing the parking aid E139213 button. If your vehicle does not have a parking aid button, the system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 93). To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system. This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging your vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 102). Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system, may create false beeps. REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped) The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again. Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. 181 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. The distance indicator displays when the transmission is in reverse (R). The indicator displays: • As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon. • If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are grayed out. E130178 Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped) The front sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low speed. The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R) : • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system provides audio warnings only when your vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is stationary and the detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper. E187330 Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from the front bumper. The coverage area decreases at the outer corners. When your vehicle approaches an object, a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle moves closer to an object, the warning tone repeat rate increases. The warning tone sounds continuously when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front bumper. 182 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids You can switch the system off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 93). If your vehicle has a parking aid button, you can switch the system off by pressing the button. If the transmission is in neutral (N), the system provides visual indication only when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below and an obstacle is located inside the detection area. Once your vehicle is stationary, the visual indication will stop after 4 seconds. Obstacle Distance Indicator (If SIDE SENSING SYSTEM Equipped) The side sensing system uses the front and rear side sensors to detect and map obstacles that are near to the sides of your vehicle. The side sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P). The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. The indicator displays: • As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon. • If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are grayed out. Note: Obstacles that enter the side detection area without being detected and mapped by the front or rear side sensors will not be detected. If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front sensing system provides audio warnings when your vehicle is moving and the detected obstacle is moving towards your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning will be stopped after 2 seconds. Visual indication is always present in reverse (R). If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual transmission), the front sensing system provides audio and visual warnings when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 7 mph (12 km/h) and an obstacle is located inside the detection area. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning will be stopped after 2 seconds and the visual indication stops after 4 seconds. If the obstacles detected are within 12 in (30 cm), the visual indication remains on. E187810 Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from the sides of your vehicle. When the system detects an object close to the side of your vehicle, an audible warning sounds. As the object comes closer to the side of your vehicle, the rate of the audible warning increases. The rate of the audible warning varies depending on whether the obstacle is inside or outside of the driving path of your vehicle. 183 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids Obstacle Distance Indicator (If When you shift to drive (D) or any other forward gear, for example, low (L), sport (S) or any forward gear in manual transmission, the side sensing system provides audible and visual distance indication when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below and obstacles are detected within 12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are detected within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle the audible warning stops after 2 seconds and the visual distance indication stops after 4 seconds. Equipped) Note: If the obstacle remains within 12 in (30 cm) visual distance indication remains on. If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side sensing system only provides visual distance indication when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below, for example when moving on a slope, and obstacles are detected within 12 in (30 cm). When you stop your vehicle the visual distance indication stops after 4 seconds. E190459 The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. As the distance to the obstacle decreases, the indicator blocks illuminate and move toward the vehicle icon. If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks show greyed out. If the side sensing system is not available, the side distance indicator blocks will not be present. The side sensing system is not available under the following condition: • If you switch the traction control system off. When you shift to reverse (R), the side sensing system provides audible and visual distance indication when your vehicle is moving and obstacles are detected within 12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are detected within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle the audible warning stops after two seconds. The side sensing system may not be available until you have driven approximately the length of your vehicle in order for the system to reinitialize if: • You switch the ignition on, off and back on. • Your vehicle remains stationary for over two minutes. Note: Visual distance indication remains on when the transmission is in reverse (R). 184 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids • • Parallel Park Out Assist automatically steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you to enter traffic. The anti-lock brake system is activated. The traction control system is activated. ACTIVE PARK ASSIST Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not detect traffic alongside or behind your vehicle during a park assist maneuver. Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking, Parallel Park Out Assist The system may not correctly operate in any of the following conditions: • You use a spare tire or a tire significantly worn more than the other tires. • One or more tires are improperly inflated. • You try to park on a tight curve. • Something passes between the front bumper and the parking space (a pedestrian or cyclist). • The edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high off the ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck). • The weather conditions are poor (heavy rain, snow, fog, etc). WARNINGS You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause interference. Active park assist does not apply the brakes under any circumstances. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can affect the system's accuracy. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. The system detects an available parallel or perpendicular parking space and automatically steers your vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you to park your vehicle. Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle exhaust, truck air brakes or horns). Do not use the system if: • You have attached a bike rack, trailer or other object near the sensors on the front or rear of your vehicle. • You have attached an overhanging object (surfboard) to the roof. If you are uncomfortable with the proximity to any vehicle or object, you may choose to override the system. 185 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids • • A foreign object damages or obstructs the front or rear bumper or side sensors. The correct tire size is not in use on your vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire). When driving at a speed less than 22 mph (35 km/h) the system automatically scans both sides of your vehicle for an available parking space. The system displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator to select searching either to the left-hand side or right-hand side of your vehicle. If the direction indicators are not used, the system defaults to the passenger side of your vehicle. Using Active Park Assist - Parallel Parking Press the button located on the center console near the gearshift E146186 lever or the right side of the center stack once. E130107 Note: You can also activate the Active Park Assist system after you have already driven partially or completely past a parking space. To do so, press the Active Park button and the system will inform you if you have recently passed a suitable parking space. Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space (for example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving, it offers the last one). Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system shows a message to alert you to reduce your vehicle speed. When the system finds a suitable space, it displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and follow the instructions on the screen. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may need to pull forward a short distance before the system is ready to park. Automatic Steering into Parking Space Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted (driver input), the system switches off and you need to take full control of your vehicle. Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver. When you shift the transmission into reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel (and nothing obstructing its movement), your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle back and forth in the space. Note: You should drive your vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel as possible to the other vehicles while passing a parking space. 186 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids E130108 Using Active Park Assist Perpendicular Parking When you think your vehicle is properly parked, or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied by a display message and a chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop. Press the button located on the center console near the gearshift E146186 lever or the right side of the center stack twice. When automatic steering is complete, the system displays a message and a tone sounds, indicating that the active park assist process is finished. You are responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle. The system displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator to select searching either to the left-hand side or right-hand side of your vehicle. Note: If you do not make a selection the system will default to the passenger's side. E186193 Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver. When the system finds a suitable space, it displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and follow the instructions on the screen. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may need to pull forward a short distance before the system is ready to park. Note: You should drive your vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as possible to the other vehicles while passing a parking space. 187 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space (for example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving, it offers the last one). When you shift the transmission into reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel (and nothing obstructing its movement), your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle back and forth in the space. Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the system shows a message to alert you to reduce your vehicle speed. When you think your vehicle is properly parked, or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied by a display message and a chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop. Automatic Steering into Parking Space Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted (driver input), the system switches off and you need to take full control of your vehicle. When automatic steering is complete, the system displays a message and a tone sounds, indicating that the active park assist process is finished. You are responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle. Using Active Park Assist - Parallel Park Out Assist E146186 E186191 The system displays a message requesting an indication of direction. Use the direction indicator to signal which side of your vehicle you want to exit the parking space. E188012 188 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing While your vehicle is at rest in a parallel parking space, press the active park assist button. Parking Aids Deactivating the Active Park Assist Feature The system determines the clearance to the front and rear of your vehicle and automatically steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you to enter traffic. Manually deactivate the system by: • Pressing the active park assist button during an active maneuver. • Grabbing the steering wheel during an active maneuver. • Driving above approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active park search. • Driving above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) during automatic steering. • Switching off the traction control system. After the system has directed your vehicle past the adjacent vehicle or object, it guides you to take control of the steering to complete the exit from the parking spot. Note: If the clearance in front of your vehicle allows easy departure, the Parallel Park Out Assist feature might not be available. Note: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle and making sure the path is clear prior to pulling into traffic. Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate the system, such as: • Traction control has activated. • There is an anti-lock brake system activation or failure. Note: This system is not intended to assist in exiting perpendicular parking spaces, damages to your vehicle may occur. If a problem occurs with the system, a warning message displays accompanied by a tone. Occasional system messages may occur in normal operation. For recurring or frequent system faults, contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced. Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted (driver input), the system switches off and you need to take full control of your vehicle. Troubleshooting the System The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off. The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space. 189 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids The system does not offer a particular space The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality. There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park. There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space. The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away. Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking. The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with reverse [R] selected). An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly. Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly. You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes). A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities. A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed). The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed. The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash). WARNINGS REAR VIEW CAMERA Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. WARNINGS The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. 190 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids WARNINGS Reverse your vehicle as slow as possible, higher speeds may limit your reaction time to stop your vehicle. Using the Rear View Camera System Use caution when the rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when the rear cargo door is ajar. Some vehicles may not come equipped with guidelines. Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in reverse (R). The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: • Active guidelines: Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversing. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you. • Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer). Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle. During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind your vehicle. Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and the luggage compartment door or liftgate is open, no rear view camera features will display. Note: When towing, the camera only sees what you are towing. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear when you connect the trailer tow connector. E142435 The camera is located on the luggage compartment door. 191 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: • Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating. • Mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. • The rear of your vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned. A B C D E Camera System Settings You can access the rear view camera system settings through the display screen. See General Information (page 93). Camera Guidelines Note: Active guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). F E142436 A Active guidelines B Centerline C Fixed guideline: Green zone D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone E Fixed guideline: Red zone F Rear bumper Active guidelines are only shown with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If you change the steering wheel position while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. 192 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Parking Aids Manual Zoom The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight. WARNING When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle. Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: When you enable manual zoom, only the centerline is shown. Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF. Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse (R). Rear Camera Delay Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF. When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until: • Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases. • You shift your vehicle into park (P) (automatic transmission). • You apply the parking brake (manual transmission). E190459 The system will provide an image of your vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones will highlight green, yellow and red when the parking aid sensors detect an object in the coverage area. 193 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Cruise Control Setting the Cruise Speed PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press and release SET+. Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h). 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Note: The indicator will change color. Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set speed while driving uphill. USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNINGS Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Changing the Set Speed • When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes but a warning displays. • • Press and release SET+ or SET-. When you select km/h as the display measurement in the Information display the set speed changes in approximately 1 km/h increments. When you select mph as the display measurement in the information display the set speed changes in approximately 1 mph increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press and release SET+. Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set. E197198 The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Canceling the Set Speed Switching Cruise Control On Press and release CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. Press and release ON. Resuming the Set Speed The indicator appears in the instrument cluster. Press and release RES. E71340 194 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Cruise Control Switching Cruise Control Off WARNINGS Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow. Press and release OFF when the system is in stand by mode or switch the ignition off. Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway, on roads with intersections or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep slopes. Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off. USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped) Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. WARNINGS Always pay close attention to changing road conditions when using adaptive cruise control. The system does not replace attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to the road may result in a crash, serious injury or death. Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. Adaptive cruise control does not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h). The system adjusts your vehicle speed to maintain the set gap between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You can select four gap settings. Do not use adaptive cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Do not use adaptive cruise control when towing a trailer that has trailer brakes. The auto-brake component of the adaptive cruise control system does not operate the trailer brakes. Using adaptive cruise control when towing a trailer that has trailer brakes may result in the loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. Adaptive cruise control is not a crash warning or avoidance system. Adaptive cruise control does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road. Adaptive cruise control does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane. 195 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Cruise Control Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press and release SET-. A green indicator light, the current gap setting and your set speed appear in the information display. 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. E164805 4. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a vehicle detected in front of you. Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display. E222790 The adaptive cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When Your Vehicle is Stationary Press and release ON. E144529 1. 2. 3. 4. The indicator appears in the information display. E164805 The current gap setting and set speed also appear in the information display. 196 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Follow a vehicle to a complete stop. Keep the brake pedal fully pressed. Press and release RES+. The set speed automatically adjusts to 20 mph (30 km/h). A green indicator light and the current gap setting appear in the information display. Cruise Control Following a Vehicle If the system predicts that its maximum braking level is insufficient, an audible warning sounds while the system continues to brake. The red warning bar appears on the windshield. You should take immediate action. WARNINGS When following a vehicle, your vehicle does not always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. Following a Vehicle to a Complete Stop If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains stationary for less than three seconds, your vehicle automatically accelerates from a stationary position to follow the vehicle ahead when you release the brake pedal. Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. You should always apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains stationary for more than three seconds, you must press and release the RES+ button or the accelerator pedal to accelerate from a stationary position and follow the vehicle ahead. Note: The brakes may emit noise when applied by the system. When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster. Setting the Gap Distance You can decrease or increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front by pressing the gap control. When you are following a vehicle and you switch on your left directional indicator, adaptive cruise control may provide a small temporary acceleration to help you pass. Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions. Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from the vehicle ahead until: • The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle in front of you moves out of the lane you are in. • You set a new gap distance. A B The vehicle applies brakes to slow the vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. The maximum braking which the system can apply is limited. You can override the system by applying the brakes. E222791 197 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Gap decrease. B Gap increase. Cruise Control The selected gap appears in the information display as shown by the bars in the graphic. Four gap distance settings are available. E164805 Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings Set speed mph ( km/h) Graphic display, bars indicated between vehicles Time gap, seconds Distance gap yd (m) Dynamic behavior 62 (100) 1 1 31 (28) Sport. 62 (100) 2 1.4 43 (39) Normal. 62 (100) 3 1.8 55 (50) Normal. 62 (100) 4 2.2 67 (61) Comfort. Each time you start the vehicle, the system selects the last chosen gap setting. Changing the Set Speed Overriding the System • WARNING Whenever the driver presses the accelerator pedal and overrides the system, the system does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain the set distance from any vehicle ahead. Press the accelerator pedal to override the set speed and gap distance. • When you override the system, the green indicator light E144529 illuminates and the lead vehicle graphic does not show in the information display. • The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a slower speed if following a slower vehicle. 198 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Press and release RES+ or SET-. When you select km/h as the display measurement in the information display the set speed changes in approximately 2 km/h increments. When you select mph as the display measurement in the information display the set speed changes in approximately 1 mph increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press and release RES+ or SET-. Press and hold RES+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. The set speed changes in approximately 5 mph/10 km/h increments. Cruise Control • • Hilly Condition Usage Press the RES+ or SET- button to change the set speed in increments of approximately 1 mph or 2 km/h. Hold the RES+ or SET- button to change the set speed in increments of approximately 5 mph or 10 km/h. Select a lower gear during prolonged downhill driving on steep slopes, such as mountainous areas, when the system is active. In such situations, the system needs additional engine braking to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent the brakes from overheating. The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. Note: An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it is applying brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to cool. The system functions normally again when the brakes cool. Canceling the Set Speed Press and release CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off Resuming the Set Speed Press and release OFF when the system is in stand by mode or switch the ignition off. Press and release RES+. The vehicle returns to the previously set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display while the system is active. Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off. Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it. Detection Issues Automatic Cancellation On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. WARNING Automatic cancellation occurs if: • The tires lose traction. • You apply the parking brake. Note: If the engine speed drops too low, the information display indicates low engine speed. Shift to a lower gear (manual transmission only) to avoid automatic cancellation. The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you. Park Brake Application Automatic parking brake application and cancellation occurs if: • You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the door while stopped. • Holding the vehicle at a stop continuously for more than two minutes. 199 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Cruise Control If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detections. See an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation. System Not Available Conditions that can cause the system to deactivate or prevent the system from activating when requested include: • A blocked sensor. • High brake temperature. • A failure in the system or a related system. • The system does not detect a lead vehicle while stopped or driving at low speeds. Blocked Sensor E71621 Detection issues can occur: A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front. B With vehicles that edge into your lane. The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully into your lane. C E145632 A message appears if something obstructs the sensor's radar signals. The sensor is located behind a cover near the driver side of the lower grille. The system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not function when something obstructs the radar signal. There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road. In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert and intervene when necessary. Note: You cannot see the sensor, it is behind a fascia panel. The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying. 200 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Cruise Control Cause Action The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or obstructed in some way. or remove the object causing the obstruction. The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several but the message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free from obstruction. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead. Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface Do not use the system in these conditions of the road may interfere with the radar because it may not detect any vehicles signals. ahead. You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no roadside objects. Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control. The cruise control indicator light replaces the adaptive cruise E71340 control indicator light if you select normal cruise control. The gap setting does not display, the system does not automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking does not activate. Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments. A false blocked condition either self clears or clears after a you restart your vehicle. Switching to Normal Cruise Control WARNING Normal cruise control does not brake for slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary. You can manually change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display. 201 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids When activated, the system will monitor your alertness level based upon your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings, and other factors. DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped) PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING System Warnings The driver alert system is designed to aid you. It is not intended to replace your attention and judgment. You are still responsible to drive with due care and attention. Note: The system will not issue warnings below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h). The warning system has two stages. At first, the system issues a temporary warning that you need to take a rest. This message will only appear for a short time. If the system detects further reduction in driving alertness, it may issue another warning that will remain in the information display for a longer time. You can press OK on the steering wheel control to clear the warning. Note: The system will store the on or off setting in the information display menu through ignition cycles. Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). When below the activation speed, the information display will inform the driver that the system is unavailable. System Display Note: The system works as long as one lane marking can be detected by the camera. When active the system will run automatically in the background and only issue a warning if required. You can view the status at any time using the information display. See General Information (page 93). Note: If the camera is blocked or if the windshield is damaged, the system may not function. Note: The system may not be available in poor weather or other low visibility conditions. The alertness level is shown by six steps in a colored bar. The system automatically monitors your driving behavior using various inputs including the front camera sensor. If the system detects that your driving alertness is reduced below a certain threshold, the system will alert you using a chime and a message in the cluster display. E131358 The current assessment of your alertness is within a typical range. USING DRIVER ALERT Switching the System On and Off Switch the system on or off using the information display. See General Information (page 93). 202 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped) WARNINGS Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle. E131359 The current assessment of your alertness indicates that you should rest as soon as safely possible. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. The status bar will travel from left to right as the calculated alertness level decreases. As the rest icon is approached the color turns from green to yellow to red. In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. The yellow position indicates the first warning is active and the red position indicates the second warning is active. Note: If you have recently received a warning; you should consider resting, even if the current assessment is within the typical range. Large contrasts in outside lighting can limit sensor performance. The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the road lane markings or if your vehicle speed drops below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h), the alertness level will change to grey for a short time and the information display will inform you that the system is unavailable. If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Note: The system works above 40 mph (64 km/h). Resetting the System You can reset the system by either: • • Note: The system works as long as the camera can detect one lane marking. Switching the ignition off and on. Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver’s door. Note: The system may not function if the camera is blocked or there is damage to the windshield. Note: When Aid mode is on and the system detects no steering activity for a short period, the system will alert you to put your hands on the steering wheel. The system may detect a light grip or touch on the steering wheel as hands off driving. 203 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids The system notifies you to stay in your lane through the steering system and the instrument cluster display when the front camera detects an unintentional drift out of your lane is likely to occur. The system automatically detects and tracks the road lane markings using a camera mounted behind the interior rear view mirror. Alert only – Provides a steering wheel vibration when the system detects an unintended lane departure. Switching the System On and Off Note: The system on or off setting is stored until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey is detected. If the system detects a MyKey it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert. Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the button will not affect the on or off status of the system. E144813 E165516 Aid only – Provides an assistance steering torque input toward the lane center when the system detects an unintended lane departure. Press the button on the steering wheel stalk to switch the system on or off. System Settings The system has optional setting menus available. The system stores the last-known selection for each of these settings. You do not need to readjust your settings each time you turn on the system. Mode: This setting allows you to select which of the system features you can enable. E165517 A Alert B Aid Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering torque input toward the lane center. If your vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the system provides a steering wheel vibration. Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate general zone coverage. They do not provide exact zone parameters. E165515 204 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of the steering wheel vibration used for the alert and alert + aid modes. This setting does not affect the aid mode. • • • • • • • Low Normal High • System Display Your vehicle is under the activation speed. The turn indicator is active. Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver. The road has no or poor lane markings in the camera field-of-view. The camera is obscured or unable to detect the lane markings due to environmental conditions (significant sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog), traffic conditions (following a large vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the lane), or vehicle conditions (poor headlamp illumination). See Troubleshooting for additional information. Green: Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning or intervention, on the indicated side(s). E151660 Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping aid intervention. When you switch on the system, an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will display in the information display. If you select aid mode when you switch on the system, a separate white icon will also appear or in some vehicles arrows will display with the lane markings. Red: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning. The system can be temporarily suppressed at any time by the following: When you switch off the system, the lane marking graphics will not display. • • • • While the system is on, the color of the lane markings will change to indicate the system status. Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily unable to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side(s). This may be because: 205 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Quick braking. Fast acceleration. Using the turn signal indicator. Evasive steering maneuver. Driving Aids Troubleshooting Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road? Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature Sun is shining directly into the camera lens Quick intentional lane change Staying too close to the lane marking Driving at high speeds in curves The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones) Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa Sudden offset in lane markings ABS or AdvanceTrac activation Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa Standing water on the road Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads) Lane width too narrow or too wide Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads 206 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode? High cross winds Large road crown Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified The Blind Spot Information System is designed to aid you in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is designed to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving. BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM WARNING To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the Blind Spot Information System as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind Spot Information System is not a replacement for careful driving. Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not prevent contact with other vehicles or objects; nor detect parked vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure (fences, guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert you to vehicles in the blind spot zones. Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two seconds, the system does not trigger. A Using the System The Blind Spot Information System turns on when you start the engine and you drive your vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h). A E124788 207 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot Information System remains on while the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot Information System turns off. Once shifted back into drive (D), the Blind Spot Information System turns back on when you drive your vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h). System Sensor Blockage WARNING To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the Blind Spot Information System as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind Spot Information System is not a replacement for careful driving. For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot Information System is on for all gears except the reverse (R). Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not function in reverse (R) or park (P). System Lights and Messages E142442 The Blind Spot Information System illuminates an amber alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from. When the Blind Spot Information System is alerting on a vehicle and the corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind Spot Information System alert indicator flashes as an increased warning level. E205199 The system uses radar sensors that are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow in front of the sensors and/or driving in heavy rain can cause system degradation. Also, other types of obstructions in front of the sensor can cause system degradation. This is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition. The alert indicator dims when the system detects nighttime darkness. Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of an alert and the turn signal is set to that side at the same time. 208 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Switching the System Off and On Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or repair compound to these areas, this can cause degraded system performance. You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot Information System off in the information display. See General Information (page 93). When the Blind Spot Information System switches off, you will not receive alerts and the information display shows a system off message. The telltale in the cluster also illuminates. When you switch the Blind Spot Information System on or off, the alert indicators flash twice. If the system detects a degraded performance condition, a message warning of a blocked sensor will appear in the information display. Also the BLIS alert indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no longer provide any vehicle warnings. You can clear the information display warning but the alert indicators will remain illuminated. Note: The Blind Spot Information System remembers the last selected on or off setting. A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two ways: • After the blockage in front of the sensors is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to detect passing vehicles. • By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON. You can also have the Blind Spot Information System switched off permanently at an authorized dealer. Once switched off permanently, the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer. CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a factory equipped trailer tow module and it is towing a trailer, the sensors will automatically turn the Blind Spot Information System off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is recommended to turn the Blind Spot Information System off manually. Operating the Blind Spot Information System with a trailer attached will cause poor system performance. WARNING To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the Cross Traffic Alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a replacement for careful driving. Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in reverse (R). System Errors If the system senses a problem with the left or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and a message will appear in the information display. See Information Messages (page 102). Using the System Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start the engine and you shift into reverse (R). Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic Alert turns off. Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions while your transmission is in reverse (R). 209 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness. Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect vehicles that approach with a speed up to 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or E142440 In this first example, the left sensor is only partially obstructed; zone coverage to the right is nearly maximized. E142441 210 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that side is severely limited. System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts E142442 The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also sounds an audible alert and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse sensing system that sounds its own series of tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 181). E205199 The system uses radar sensors that are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas, this can cause degraded system performance. See Blind Spot Information System (page 207). If the Blind Spot Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A corresponding message appears in the information display as soon as you shift the transmission into reverse (R). System Limitations Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations; situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build-up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection. 211 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on whenever the ignition is switched on and ready to provide appropriate alerts when the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross Traffic Alert will not remember the last selected on or off setting. The following are other situations that may limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance: • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors. • Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). • Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph (12 km/h). • Backing out of an angled parking spot. You can also have Cross Traffic Alert switched off permanently at an authorized dealer. Once switched off permanently, the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer. False Alerts STEERING Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a factory equipped trailer tow module and it is towing a trailer, the sensors will automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross Traffic Alert performance. Electric Power Steering WARNINGS The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the ignition on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. There may be certain instances when there is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert system that illuminates the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some amount of false alerts are normal; they are temporary and self-correct. If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Obtain immediate service from an authorized dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of steering control. System Errors If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with the left or right sensor a message will appear in the information display. See (page 93). Switching the System Off and On Your vehicle has an electric power steering system. There is no fluid reservoir. No maintenance is required. You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic Alert off in the information display. See General Information (page 93). When you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will not receive alerts and the information display will display a system off message. If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving, electric power steering assistance is lost. The steering system still operates and you can steer your vehicle manually. Manually steering your vehicle requires more effort. 212 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort required for you to steer your vehicle. This increased effort prevents overheating and permanent damage to the steering system. You do not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually. Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation. PRE-COLLISION ASSIST WARNINGS At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Steering Tips The system does not detect cyclists, animals, pedestrians at night or vehicles that are driving in a different direction. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • Correct tire pressures. • Uneven tire wear. • Loose or worn suspension components. • Loose or worn steering components. • Improper vehicle alignment. The system does not operate during hard acceleration or steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury. Note: A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull. The system may fail or operate with reduced function during cold and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the system. Keep the front camera and radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Adaptive Learning The electronic power steering system adaptive learning helps correct road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering feel. It communicates with the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems. In situations where the vehicle camera has limited detection capability, this may reduce system performance. These situations include but are not limited to direct or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail lights, unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians with complex backgrounds, running pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or pedestrians that the system cannot distinguish from a group. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. 213 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Alert: When activated, a red warning light flashes, an audible warning chime sounds and a warning message shows in the information display. WARNINGS This system is an extra driving aid. It does not replace your attention and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake pedal when necessary, you may collide with another vehicle. Brake Support: The brake support system assists the driver in reducing the collision speed by lightly applying the brakes. If the risk of collision further increases after the warning light illuminates, the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking. This may be apparent to the driver. The system does not automatically activate the brakes, but if you press the brake pedal, the system may apply full force, even if the brake pedal is lightly pressed. The system cannot help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain a safe distance and speed. Using the Pre-Collision Assist System Active Braking: Active braking may activate if the system determines that a collision is imminent. The system may help the driver reduce impact damage or avoid the crash completely. The Pre-Collision Assist system is active at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h). Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist alerts as being too frequent or disturbing, then you can reduce the alert sensitivity, though the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings. E156130 If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours, or a pedestrian within your driving path, the system is design to provide three levels of functionality: Blocked Sensors 1. Alert 2. Brake Support 3. Active Braking E184569 E156131 214 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids If a message regarding a blocked sensor or camera appears in the information display, the radar signals or camera images are obstructed. The radar sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille. With an obstructed radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does not function and cannot detect a vehicle ahead. With the front camera obstructed, the Pre-Collision Assist system does not respond to pedestrians or stationary vehicles and the system performance on moving vehicles reduces. The following table lists possible causes and actions for when this message displays. Cause Action Clean the grille surface in front of the radar The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or remove the object causing the obstrucor obstructed in some way. tion. The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that there is no obstruction. The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporHeavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should with the radar signals. automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve. The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporSwirling water, or snow or ice on the surface arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should of the road may interfere with the radar automatically reactivate a short time after signals. the weather conditions improve. Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact. Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation. The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera. The windshield in front of the camera is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect that there is no obstruction. Note: Proper system operation requires a clear view of the road by the camera. Have any windshield damage in the area of the camera's field of view repaired. Note: If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detections. Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation. 215 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Aids Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat at the camera or a potential misalignment condition, a message may display in the information display indicating temporary sensor unavailability. This message deactivates automatically when operational conditions are corrected (for example, when the ambient temperature around the sensor decreases or the sensor automatically recalibrates successfully). 216 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying LOAD LIMIT Tire and Loading Label Information Example: Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer This section guides you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both. Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before you load your vehicle, become familiar with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight rating, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label or Safety Compliance Certification label. E198719 Payload PAYLOAD E143816 217 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading label. The label is either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a tire and loading label. Look for “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire and Loading Information label is the maximum payload for your vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any additional equipment on your vehicle, you must determine the new payload. Subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire and Loading label. When towing, trailer tongue weight or king pin weight is also part of payload. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These numbers are on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes all options, equipment, passengers and cargo. It appears on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. 218 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The gross combined weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating. Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. Safety Compliance Certification Label Example: E198828 WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to your vehicle, personal injury or both. Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight Maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) GCWR is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing 219 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying Steps for determining the correct load limit: Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 220 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Load Carrying - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the front or the rear gross axle weight rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 221 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing Load Placement TOWING A TRAILER To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving: • Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor. • Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires. • Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. • Select a ball mount with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side. When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit (page 217). You can also find information in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer, or online. WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Note: Your vehicle may have electrical items, such as fuses or relays, related to towing. See Fuses (page 245). Your vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer. Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components periodically during, and after, any towing operation. 222 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/ Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight, as the vehicle’s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes. Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart. RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart below. Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. 2 2 Do not exceed 12 feet (1.11 meters ) for 1.5L GTDI and 2.5L TiVCT or 20 2 2 feet (1.86 meters ) for 2.0L GTDI. Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point. Powertrain Maximum trailer weight 1.5L GTDI 1000 lb (454 kg) 2.0L GTDI 2000 lb (907 kg) 2.5L TiVCT 1000 lb (454 kg) 2.7L GTDI 1000 lb (454 kg) * Calculated with SAE J2807 method. 223 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing * Towing Trailer Brakes ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS WARNING Follow these guidelines for safe towing: • Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). • Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer. • See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications. • Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your scheduled maintenance information. • If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you. Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations. The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating. You can find information on load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label as well as instructions on calculating your vehicle's load in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit (page 217). Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms) when load. Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight. Trailer Lamps WARNING Hitches Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required. Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle. Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the tongue. Safety Chains Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper. Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch. To connect the safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. 224 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing Before Towing a Trailer 1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow. 2. Set your vehicle parking brake. 3. Place the automatic transmission in position P. 4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included with vehicle.) Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles. When Towing a Trailer • • • • • • • • • Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC) Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles (800 kilometers). Do not make full-throttle starts. Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers). When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A/C performance. Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade: Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water. When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components: • Causing internal damage to the components. • Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability. Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime you submerge the rear axle in water. Water may contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is not a normal maintenance inspection item unless there is a possibility of a leak or other axle repair is required. 225 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing Vehicles Equipped with 1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L Engines TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Front-wheel Drive Vehicles Emergency Towing Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are using a tow dolly, follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider. WARNING If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: • Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction. • Place the transmission in position N. If you cannot move the transmission into N, you must override it and enable stay in neutral mode. Failing to do so may result in damage to the transmission. See Transmission (page 163). • Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers). • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). • Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers). All-wheel Drive Vehicles All-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow your vehicle. Vehicles Equipped with a 2.7L Engine You can tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground using the Neutral Tow feature, or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If you are using a vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider. If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground: Recreational Towing • • Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. See Climate Control (page 117). Neutral Tow Enter Neutral Tow mode by doing the following: Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission. 1. 226 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Tow only in the forward direction. Release the parking brake. Put the ignition in accessory mode by pressing the engine START button without pressing the brake pedal. Towing 2. Select the neutral tow option under the vehicle settings menu in the information display. See General Information (page 93). 3. Press and hold the OK button to start the neutral tow process. 4. Press the brake pedal and select N on the rotary shift transmission. 5. Turn the ignition off by pressing the engine START button without pressing the brake pedal. If the process completes successfully: • • the N on the rotary shift transmission blinks slowly. A confirmation message appears in the information display. Note: If the parking brake is applied, a message appears in the information display. Note: Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h). Note: Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and every six hours (or fewer). Shut the engine off and verify that a message appears indicating neutral tow has been engaged, before continuing to tow. Exit Neutral Tow mode, make sure the ignition is on (engine can be on or off), press the brake pedal and select P on the rotary shift transmission. If the process is completed successfully, a message appears indicating that neutral tow has disengaged in both the instrument cluster and rotary shift transmission display P. 227 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Hints There are also some things you may want to avoid doing because they reduce your fuel economy: • Avoid sudden or hard accelerations. • Avoid revving the engine before turning off the car. • Avoid long idle periods. • Do not warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. • Reduce the use of air conditioning and heat. • Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain. • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. • Avoid carrying unnecessary weight. • Avoid adding particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks). • Avoid driving with the wheels out of alignment. BREAKING-IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). ECONOMICAL DRIVING Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive, the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle. There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel economy: • Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion. • Drive at steady speeds. • Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving (When running errands, go to the furthest destination first and then work your way back home). • Close the windows for high-speed driving. • Drive at reasonable speeds. • Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size. • Use the recommended engine oil. • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle. Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage. Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the front rocker area of your vehicle. 228 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Hints WARNINGS Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position. Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. E176360 When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so: • • • • Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation. Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work. Check that the horn works. Check that the exterior lights work. Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works. Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement. FLOOR MATS Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control. WARNINGS Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. 229 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Driving Hints E142666 To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. 230 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km). ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • • Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services. 24 hours a day, seven days a week. For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner's Manual portfolio. Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance covers: • A flat tire change with a good spare, if provided with the vehicle (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit). • Battery jump start. • Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). • Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. • Winch out — available within 100 ft (30.5 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries. • Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the owner's information portfolio in the glove compartment. United States Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States. 231 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage is concurrent with the powertrain coverage period of your vehicle. FUEL SHUTOFF WARNING Failure to inspect and, if necessary, repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury. Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision. Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact will cause a shutoff. In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment of your vehicle. Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles equipped with a key system: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel pump. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. For complete program coverage details you may contact your dealer, you can call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. For vehicles equipped with a push button start system: 1. Press the START/STOP button to switch off the ignition. 2. Press the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button to switch on the ignition. 3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button to switch off the ignition. 4. You can either attempt to start the engine by pressing the brake pedal and the START/STOP button, or switch on the ignition only by pressing the START/STOP button without pressing the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the fuel system. HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Note: If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery will lose charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle. The hazard warning button is located on the instrument panel. Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. • • Press the button to turn on the hazard warning function, and the front and rear direction indicators will flash. Press the button again to turn them off. 232 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle electrical system. Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once your vehicle determines that the systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow you to restart. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact an authorized dealer. Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNINGS Do not attach the cables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts. To avoid reverse polarity connections, make sure that you correctly identify the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both the disabled and booster vehicles before connecting the cables. JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. Do not attach the end of the positive cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located above the positive (+) terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow through and cause damage to the fuses. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps. Preparing Your Vehicle Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage. E226509 A. Negative prong (–) Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your vehicle. B. Positive prong (+) 233 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies Note: Remove the red cap from the positive prong (B) on your vehicle before connecting the cables. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle's engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) cable to a ground connection point if available. Jump Starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and rev the engine moderately, or press the accelerator gently to keep your engine speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as shown in your tachometer. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 1 3 4 2 Removing the Jumper Cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. E142664 Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle represents the booster vehicle. 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 234 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicators and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners. 4 2 The horn and indicators will turn off when: • You press the hazard control button. • You press the panic button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). • Your vehicle runs out of power. 1 SPINOUT DETECTION If your vehicle detects a spinout and it comes to a stop, the hazard warning flashers turn on. A spinout detected message appears in the information display. The message may not appear if your vehicle runs out of power. 3 After your vehicle's hazard warning flashers turn on, you can switch them off by: • Pressing the hazard warning flasher button. • Pressing the remote control unlock button. • Pressing the remote control panic button. • Switching the ignition on and off twice. E142665 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable from the disabled vehicle. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle battery. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 235 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies It is acceptable to have your front-wheel drive vehicle towed from the front if using proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels off the ground. When towing in this manner, the rear wheels can remain on the ground. TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels placed on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission. Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive vehicle requires that all wheels be off the ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission, all-wheel or four-wheel drive system and vehicle. TOWING POINTS Due to local market requirements in some countries, some vehicles may be equipped with a recovery hook. Recovery Hook Location If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in recovery hook, it is located with the spare tire kit. E143886 If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. Installing the Recovery Hook There is an installation point for the recovery hook located behind the fascia. We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means. Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install it. Make sure that the recovery hook is fully tightened. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 236 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Roadside Emergencies E146284 E188420 Remove the recovery hook cover by prying it off at the notch with a screwdriver or similar object. Note: Use a soft cloth to cover the prying tool. This helps prevent scratch marks to the vehicle's paint. 237 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Website www.owner.ford.com Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. These are some of the items that can be found online: • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State or Zip Code. • Owner Manuals. • Maintenance Schedules. • Recalls. • Ford Extended Service Plans. • Ford Genuine Accessories. • Service specials and promotions. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer. In Canada: A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford. Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 Away From Home Telephone If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer. 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Website www.ford.ca In the United States: Twitter Mailing address @FordServiceCA (English Canada) @FordServiceQC (Quebec) Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48126 Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: Telephone 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 1. Additional information and resources are available online: 238 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer. Customer Assistance 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. 3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. In order to help us serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: • Vehicle Identification Number. • Your telephone number (home and business). • The name of the authorized dealer and city where located. • The vehicle’s current odometer reading. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first: In some states within the United States, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state's warranty laws, and Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt. Additionally, in some states within the United States, a consumer has the option of submitting a warranty dispute to the BBB Auto Line before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time). In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 239 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter. BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines. THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program. You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to: The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing. BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673. Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation. 240 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center. The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 Fax: (313) 390-0804 Email: [email protected] 241 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673). If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company by emailing [email protected]. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673) FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: [email protected] www.ford.com.pr Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST Ford: 80004443673 Lincoln: 80004441067 If calling from the UAE: 80004441066 If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 8008443673 If calling from Kuwait: 22280384 Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) FAX: +971 4 3327266 Email: [email protected] www.me.ford.com 242 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) E142557 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of Canada. 243 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Customer Assistance Transport Canada Contact Information Website www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigationsindex-76.htm (English) Website www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetesindex-76.htm (French) Phone 1–800–333–0510 Ford of Canada Contact Information Website www.ford.ca Phone 1–800–565-3673 244 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads. FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box WARNINGS Always disconnect the battery before servicing high-current fuses. If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some features will need to be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269). To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. E190797 245 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 1 30A 2 - 3 Protected components Panoramic moonroof. Starter relay. 3 15A 4 — 5 20A 6 — 7 20A 1 8 20A 1 9 — 1 Rain sensor. Blower motor relay. 3 Power point 3 - Back of console. Not used. Powertrain control module - vehicle power 1. Powertrain control module power. Powertrain control module - vehicle power 2. Emission components. Powertrain control module relay. 10 20A 11 15A 12 15A 13 10A 14 10A 15 — 16 20A 3 2 Power point 1 - driver front. Powertrain control module - vehicle power 4. Ignition coils. 2 Powertrain control module - vehicle power 3. Non-emission components. 2 Not used. 2 Not used. Run-start relay. 3 Power point 2 - console. 17 — Not used. 18 — Not used. 19 10A 20 10A 1 Run-start electronic power assist steering. 1 Adaptive cruise control. 246 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 21 15A 22 10A 23 15A 24 — 1 1 1 Protected components Run/start transmission control. Transmission oil pump start/stop. Air conditioner clutch solenoid. Run-start. Blind spot information system. Rear view camera. Heads-up display. Voltage stability module. Gear shift actuator. Not used. 25 2 10A Run-start anti-lock brake system. 26 10A 2 Run-start powertrain control module. 27 — Not used. 28 — Not used. 29 5A 30 — Not used. 31 — Not used. 32 — Electric fan 1 relay. 33 — A/C clutch relay. 1 Mass air flow monitor. 34 — Not used. 35 — Not used. 36 — Not used. 37 — Not used. 38 — Electric fan 2 relay. 39 — Electric fan coil 2 and 3 relay. 40 — Horn relay. 41 — Not used. 42 — Fuel pump coil relay. 247 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses 1 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 43 — Not used. 44 — Not used. 45 — Not used. 46 — Not used. 47 — Not used. 48 — Not used. 49 — Not used. 50 20A 51 — Not used. 52 — Not used. 53 — 1 Horn. 10A 55 10A Not used. 54 2 Brake on off switch. 2 ALT sensor. Micro fuse. 2 Dual micro fuse. 3 M-type fuse. Power Distribution Box - Bottom There are fuses located on the bottom of the fuse box. To access the bottom of the fuse box, do the following: 248 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses 1. Release the two latches, located on both sides of the fuse box. 2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box from the cradle. 3. Move the fuse box toward the center of the engine compartment. 4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box to access the bottom side. E145983 E190798 249 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 56 — 57 — Not used. Not used. 58 30A 59 30A 1 Fuel pump feed. 2 Electric fan 3 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines). 2 Electric fan 3 (3.0L engine). 2 Electric fan 1 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines). 2 Electric fan 1 (3.0L engine). 40A 60 30A 40A 61 Protected components — Not used. 62 2 50A Body control module 1. 63 25A 1 Electric fan 2 (1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L engines). 1 Electric fan 2 (3.0L engine). 30A 64 — Not used. 65 20A 66 — 67 50A 68 40A 69 30A 70 30A 71 — 72 20A 1 Trans oil pump. 73 20A 1 Rear heated seats. 74 30A 1 Driver seat module. 75 25A 1 Wiper motor 1. 1 Front heated seat. Not used. 2 Body control module 2. 1 Heated rear window. 1 Anti-lock brake system valves. 1 Passenger seat. Not used. 250 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 76 — 77 30A 78 — 1 Not used. 1 Climate control seat module. Not used. 79 40A 80 25A 81 40A 82 – 2 Blower motor. 1 Wiper motor 2. 1 Inverter. Not used. 83 20A 84 30A 85 — 86 – 87 Protected components 60A 1 TRCM shifter. 1 Starter solenoid. Not used. Not used. 2 Anti-lock brake system pump. M-type fuse. 2 J-type fuse. Note: It may be easier to access the fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece. Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. 251 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses E145984 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 1 10A 2 7.5A 3 20A 4 5A 5 20A 6 10A 7 10A 8 10A 9 10A 10 5A 2 Keypad. Cellphone passport module. 11 5A 2 Not used (spare). 1 Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome, trunk). 1 Lumbar. 1 Driver door unlock. Not used (spare). 1 1 Subwoofer amplifier. 2 Not Used (spare). 2 Not used (spare). 2 Not used (spare). 2 Not used (spare). 252 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 12 7.5A 13 7.5A 14 10A 15 10A 16 15A 17 5A 18 5A 19 7.5A 20 7.5A 21 5A 2 Humidity and in–car temperature sensor. 22 5A 2 Not Used (spare). 23 10A 24 20A 25 30A 26 30A 27 30A 28 20A 29 30A 30 30A 31 15A 2 2 Protected components Climate control. Gear shift Steering wheel column lock. Cluster. Datalink logic. 2 Extended power module. 2 Datalink gateway module. 1 Child lock. Decklid-liftglass release. 2 Not used (spare). 2 Push button stop start switch. 2 Extended power module. 2 Adaptive headlamp. 1 Delayed accessory (power inverter logic, moonroof logic, driver master switch). 1 Central lock unlock. 1 Driver door (window, mirror). 1 Front passenger door (window, mirror). 1 Moonroof. 1 Amplifier. 1 Rear driver side door (window). 1 Rear passenger side door (window). 1 Not used (spare). 253 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses 1 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 32 10A 33 20A 34 30A 35 5A 36 15A 37 20A 38 30A 1 1 1 Protected components Global positioning system. Display. Voice control. Radio frequency receiver. Radio. Active noise control. Run-start bus (fuse 19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37, circuit breaker). Not used (spare). 1 1 1 Auto-dimming rear view mirror. Continuous control damping suspension. Rear heated seats. Heated steering wheel. Not used (spare). Micro fuse. 2 Dual micro fuse. CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. E217331 If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 254 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Fuses Fuse Types E207206 Callout Fuse Type A Micro 2 B Micro 3 C Maxi D Mini E M Case F J Case G J Case Low Profile 255 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Working with the Engine On GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Block the wheels. If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD Opening the Hood Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Precautions • • • • Do not work on a hot engine. Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts. E142457 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left-hand side of the instrument panel. 2. Slightly lift the hood. 3. Release the hood latch by pushing the secondary release lever to your left-hand side. Working with the Engine Off 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Block the wheels. 256 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 4. Open the hood. Support the hood with the strut. Closing the Hood 1. Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure it correctly after use. 2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop under its own weight for the last 8-12 in (20-30 cm). Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly closed. E87786 UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™ E184600 257 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268). E Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245). G Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). H Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™ E159754 A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). C Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). 258 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268). E Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245). G Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). H Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L E169801 A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268). E Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 245). 259 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance G Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). H Washer system fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ A E188730 B I H G D C F E A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263). B Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268). C Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269). D Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 245). E Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278). F Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 267). G Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). H Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). I Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269). 260 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make sure the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). 2. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. Checking the engine oil level too soon after you switch the engine off may result in an inaccurate reading. 5. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 256). 6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood Overview (page 257). 7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 261). 8. Make sure that the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Capacities and Specifications (page 330). 9. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the engine is running. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L ECOBOOST™ A B E199415 A Minimum. B Maximum. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L ECOBOOST™/2.5L/2.7L ECOBOOST™ A B Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil. E169062 A Minimum. B Maximum. Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,100 mi (5,000 km). Adding Engine Oil ENGINE OIL CHECK WARNING Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. To check the engine oil level consistently and accurately, do the following: 261 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 5. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap correctly. Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to reset the oil change indicator. E142732 Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers. From the main menu scroll to: Message To top up the engine oil level do the following: Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it. 1. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See Under Hood Overview (page 257). Turn it counterclockwise and remove it. 2. Add engine oil that meets the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 330). You may have to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 3. Recheck the oil level. 4. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Action and description Settings Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Vehicle Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Oil Life Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Hold OK to Press and hold the OK Reset button until the instrument cluster displays the following message. Reset Successful When the oil change indicator resets the instrument cluster displays 100%. Remaining Life {00}% 262 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Message Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We recommend, Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240 (Rotunda tool part number: ROB75240). We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration. Action and description If the instrument cluster displays one of the following messages, repeat the process. Not Reset Reset Cancelled ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Do not use coolant or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. WARNINGS Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, spilling coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. Adding Coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when you loosen the cap slightly. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. It is very important to use prediluted coolant meeting the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 330). Incorrect prediluted coolant use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. To top up the coolant level do the following: Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir. 1. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. 263 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap. Maintenance 2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 321). 3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach the correct level. 4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced. • • Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant. Recycled Coolant We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant as an approved recycling process is not yet available. Dispose of used engine coolant in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Do not mix different colors or types of prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect prediluted coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates: • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without prediluted coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. On arrival do the following: 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Chemically clean the cooling system. We recommend Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush. 3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon as possible. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • It may be necessary to decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. • A coolant concentration of 40% provides improved overheat protection. Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. Water alone, without prediluted coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. Do not use the following as a coolant substitute: • Alcohol. • Methanol. 264 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Brine. Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Maintenance Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection. When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated WARNINGS Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury. Fail-Safe Cooling Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before any incremental component damage occurs. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain. How Fail-Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. A warning lamp illuminates and a message may appear in the information display. Your vehicle has limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not maintain high-speed operation and the engine may operate poorly. If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch the engine off. 2. If you are a member of a roadside assistance program, we recommend that you contact your roadside assistance service provider. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. 5. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. Note: Driving your vehicle without repair increases the chance of engine damage. When this occurs, your vehicle still operates, however: • Engine power is limited. • The air conditioning system turns off. Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. 265 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Engine Coolant Temperature Management (If Equipped) 1. WARNING 2. To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the coolant temperature reduces. 3. If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the engine may temporarily reach higher a temperature during severe operating conditions, for example ascending a long or steep grade in high ambient temperatures. 4. 5. At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone and a message may appear in the information display. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK - 1.5L ECOBOOST™/2.0L ECOBOOST™/2.5L You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power. In order to manage the engine coolant temperature. Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on vehicle loading, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road. You can continue to drive your vehicle. The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick. Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, if the transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an authorized dealer. The air conditioning may automatically turn on and off during severe operating conditions to protect the engine from overheating. When the coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, the air conditioning turns on. Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red zone, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display, do the following: 266 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and shift the transmission into park (P). Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle returns to the normal position. After several minutes, if the temperature does not drop, follow the remaining steps. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. If the coolant level is normal, restart the engine and continue. Maintenance 2. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise direction. See Under Hood Overview (page 260). 3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level. 4. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add fluid immediately. See Adding Transmission Fluid. 5. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ WARNING Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. The transmission does not consume fluid. However, if the transmission slips or shifts slowly you should check the fluid level. If you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an authorized dealer. Low Fluid Level If the fluid level is within the minimum range (below point A) add the correct specification fluid to be within the hash mark area. See Capacities and Specifications (page 321). Checking the Transmission Fluid * Level Only check the transmission fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temprature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C). Normal operating temprature is reached after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km). A Note: If the fluid level is below the minimum range do not drive your vehicle. An underfill conition can damage the transmission. B Correct Fluid Level If the fluid level is within the hash mark area (between points A and B) do not add any fluid. High Fluid Level If the fluid level is above the maximum range (above point B) fluid may need to be removed. High fluid levels may be caused by a overheating condition. If you have operated your vehicle at high speeds, towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking the level. E190273 A Minimum B Maximum Note: Check the fluid level with the engine running and the transmission in park (P). 1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. Note: An overfill conition can damage the transmission. 267 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance * Adding Transmission Fluid 1. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise * direction. x2 2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. 3. Add fluid that meets the Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 340). Pour the fluid directly into the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick hole. 4. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level. 5. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. 6. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. * Vehicles With 2.7L EcoBoost E190367 WARNING 1. Do not run the engine with the air filter disconnected. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the two air filter assembly securing bolts. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage the locating pins. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly in a counterclockwise direction. Check the fluid level. See Checking the Transmission Fluid Level. Install in reverse order. Tighten the two air filter assembly securing bolts until you feel a strong resistance. BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer immediately. 268 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNINGS Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 321). Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. Your vehicle has a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. Note: See an authorized dealer for low voltage battery access, testing, or replacement. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. When a low voltage battery replacement is necessary, see an authorized dealer to replace the low voltage battery with a Ford recommended replacement low voltage battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS), do not allow a technician to connect any electrical device ground connection directly to the low voltage battery negative post. A connection at the low voltage battery negative post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. 269 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic accessories or components to the vehicle, the accessories or components may adversely affect the low voltage battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. 5. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. While the engine is warming up, complete the following: Reset the clock. See Audio System (page 345). Reset the power windows bounce-back feature. See Windows and Mirrors (page 81). Reset the radio station presets. See Audio System (page 345). 6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. If the engine turns off, press the accelerator pedal to start the engine. 7. While the engine is running, press the brake pedal and shift into neutral (N). 8. Allow the engine to run for at least one minute by pressing on the accelerator pedal. 9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km) to completely relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically-controlled by a computer, some engine control settings are maintained by power from the low voltage battery. Some engine computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy, optimize the driveability and performance of the engine. Some other computer settings, like the clock and radio station presets, are also maintained in memory by power from the low voltage battery. When a technician disconnects and connects the low voltage battery, these settings are erased. Complete the following procedure in order to restore the settings: Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Shift into park (P). 3. Switch off all accessories. 4. Fully press the brake pedal and start the vehicle. E142463 270 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. Vertical Aim Adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Headlamp Aiming Target The wiper arms can be manually moved when the ignition is off. This allows for ease of blade replacement and cleaning under the blades. 1 1 E142592 E129990 2 1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass. Press the locking buttons together. 2. Rotate and remove the wiper blade. 3. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when the ignition is turned on. 8 feet (2.4 meters) B Center height of lamp to ground C 25 feet (7.6 meters) D Horizontal reference line Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure 1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away. 2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height. Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other. Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance. Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield. 271 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Maintenance 3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. E145594 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2 screwdriver, turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp. The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line. 6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. E142465 4. On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern. If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line, the headlamp will need to be adjusted. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable. 272 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance REMOVING A HEADLAMP E159693 Note: To remove push pins, use a flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center release pin. 5. Remove the two screws securing the headlamp using a flat-bladed screwdriver. 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood. 2. Remove the six push pins securing the front fascia to the front trim cover. 3. Remove the three bumper cover upper screws using a flat-bladed screwdriver. 4. Remove the push pin at the inboard side of the headlamp you are servicing. E159695 6. Remove the lower three wheel housing fasteners by turning them counterclockwise. E159694 273 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 9. From the front of the vehicle, gently pull the front bumper cover forward 4 inches (10 centimeters) by grasping it next to the headlamp to be serviced and in the lower front of the wheel opening. E159696 7. Remove the two outmost front bumper cover lower fasteners, only on the side of the headlamp you are servicing, by turning them counterclockwise. E159699 10. 11. 12. Gently pull the headlamp assembly outward to disengage it from the lower fixing point. Carefully lift the headlamp and remove it from the vehicle. Disconnect the electrical connector from the headlamp assembly by pushing the release tab on the connector. E159697 CHANGING A BULB 8. Separate the front bumper cover from the fender by gently pulling the front bumper cover to the outside of the vehicle 1.2 inches (3 centimeters). WARNINGS Switch the lamps and the ignition off. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. Bulbs become hot when in use. Let them cool down before you remove them. Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 276). Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated. E159698 274 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Headlamp A The following lamps are LED: • Front side marker lamps. • Front direction indicators. • Daytime running lamps. • Side direction indicators. • Central high mounted brake lamp. • Rear direction indicators. • Brake and rear lamps. B Reversing Lamp 1. E222975 A Headlamp high beam. B Headlamp low beam. Carefully remove the luggage compartment trim panel. Note: LED headlamps are not serviceable. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Headlamp Low Beam 1. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Headlamp High Beam 1. Carefully remove the cover. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. E145779 Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. LED Lamps LED lamps are not serviceable. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 275 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 1. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the lamp. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. BULB SPECIFICATION CHART E145780 Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern, and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time. 3. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. License Plate Lamp 2 1 3 E72789 Function Trade name *Headlamp high beam (Halogen) H7LL *Headlamp low beam (Halogen) H11LL *Side marker lamp - front LED *Park lamp - front W5W *Turn lamp - front PWY24W *Fog lamp - front H11 *Tail and brake lamp - high series LED *Tail and brake lamp - low series LED Reverse lamp 921 276 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance Function Trade name *Turn lamp - rear - high series LED *Turn lamp - rear - low series LED *Side marker lamp - rear LED License plate lamp W5W *Trunk lamp W5W or LED** *High-mount brake lamp LED *Side repeater lamp LED *Interior lamp LED *To replace these bulbs, see your authorized dealer. To replace all instrument panel bulbs, see your authorized dealer. **If so equipped. 277 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Maintenance 2.5L Engine CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element listed. See Capacities and Specifications (page 321). E146047 1. For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When servicing the air cleaner, it is important that no foreign material enter the air induction system. The engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small particles. 2. 3. 4. Change the air filter element at the proper interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used. 5. EcoBoost Engines 6. 7. E144365 278 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter housing and cover to make sure no dirt gets in the engine and to make sure you have a good seal. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated. Install the air filter housing cover. Engage the clamps to secure the air filter housing cover to the air filter housing. Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Materials Name Specification Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC-42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC-15 Motorcraft® Detail Wash ESR-M14P4-A ZC-3-A Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.) ZC-20 (U.S.) Engine Shampoo Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC-56 Multi-Purpose Cleaner Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A Bitterant (U.S.) ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner ZC-54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.) ZC-14 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A ZC-23 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC-37-A • Never use strong household detergents or soap, for example dish washing or CLEANING THE EXTERIOR laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or • Never wash your vehicle when it is hot lukewarm water and a neutral pH to the touch, or during strong or direct shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft sunlight. Detail Wash. • Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel to eliminate water spotting. 279 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care • • • Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash. • • • Do not use water pressure higher than 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa). Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C). Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern. Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface. Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage painted surfaces. If these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as possible. Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface. Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody • Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material. • • Apply a high quality-cleaning product to bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. We recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Do not apply the cleaning product to hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer than the time recommended. Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. Under Hood For removing black rubber marks from under the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. WAXING Note: Never use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface. Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car's paint from the elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax. Exterior Plastic Parts For routine cleaning we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. • • Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped) • Hand washing your vehicle is preferred however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions: 280 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax. Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles. Vehicle Care • • • Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. • Roof racks. • Bumpers. • Grained door handles. • Side moldings. • Mirror housings. • Windshield cowl area. Do not apply wax to glass areas. After waxing, your car's paint should feel smooth, and be free of streaks and smudges. • • CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES Car wash chemicals and environmental fallout can result in windshield and wiper blade contamination. Dirty windshield and wipers will result in poor windshield wiper operation. Keep the windshield and wiper blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance. CLEANING THE ENGINE To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately. • For windshields contaminated with tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the entire windshield using steel wool (no greater than 0000 grade) in a circular motion and rinse with water. • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate. Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo. • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. 281 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations. Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. Vehicle Care CLEANING THE INTERIOR CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNINGS Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision. Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page 283). For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. • • • Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas. • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner. If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set. Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. • • • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use any household cleaning products or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens. Wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your warranty may not cover these damages. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces: 282 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft cloth as quickly as possible. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the soiled area. Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. You should: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible. Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather: • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners. • Household cleaners. • Alcohol solutions. • Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color. CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If Equipped) Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout. Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. Always read the instructions before using cleaning products. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS For cleaning and removing stains such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers. Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers. Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. 283 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Vehicle Care Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty cleaners in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over a period time. General Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents. • • • Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs. Body • Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain their condition we recommend that you: • • • • • • Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply using manufacturer's instructions. Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process. To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. • • • • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the underside of front fenders. Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations. Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust. Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle. Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil. Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. Engine VEHICLE STORAGE • If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. • We engineer and test all motor vehicles and their components for reliable, regular driving. Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve engine components. 284 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. Protect from sunlight, if possible. If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminates which may cause engine damage. Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. Vehicle Care • • Miscellaneous With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again. • • Fuel system • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. Removing Vehicle From Storage Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. Tires When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces. • Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. • Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. • Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up. • Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels. • If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage. • Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues. Cooling system • • Protect against freezing temperatures. When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm that there are no cooling system leaks and that fluid is at the recommended level. Battery • • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if battery cables are disconnected. Brakes • Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully. Maintain recommended air pressure. 285 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR KIT (If Equipped) Note: The temporary mobility kit contains enough sealant compound in the canister for one tire repair only. See your authorized Ford dealer for replacement sealant canisters. The kit is located under the load floor in the trunk. The kit consists of an air compressor to re-inflate the tire and a canister of sealing compound that will effectively seal most punctures caused by nails or similar objects. This kit will provide a temporary tire repair allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 120 mi (200 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to reach a tire service location. E175977 286 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A Air compressor (inside) B Selector switch C On and off button D Air pressure gauge E Sealant bottle and canister F Dual purpose hose: air and repair G Tire valve connector H Accessory power plug I Casing/housing J Bike/raft/sports ball adapters Wheels and Tires General Information • WARNING • Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become severely damaged. Only punctures located within the tire tread can be sealed with the kit. • Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to the tire's sidewall. The tire may not completely seal. • • Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason: Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph (80 km/h). • • Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi (200 km). Drive only to the closest authorized Ford dealer or tire repair shop to have your tire inspected. • • • • Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire; if the tire is losing pressure, have the vehicle towed. Read the information in the Tips for Use of the Kit section to make sure safe operation of the kit and your vehicle. • Tips for Use of the Kit • To ensure safe operation of the kit: • • • Read all instructions and cautions fully. Before operating the kit, make sure your vehicle is safely off the road and away from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard lights. Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle doesn't move unexpectedly. • 287 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Do not remove any foreign objects, such as nails or screws, from the tire. When using the kit, leave the engine running (only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area) so the compressor does not drain the vehicle's battery. Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than 15 minutes. This will help prevent the compressor from overheating. Never leave the kit unattended during operation. Sealant compound contains latex. Those with latex sensitivities should use appropriate precautions to avoid an allergic reaction. Keep the kit away from children. Only use the kit when the ambient temperature is between -22°F (-30°C) and 158°F (70°C). Only use the sealing compound before the use-by date. The use-by date is on a label on the sealant canister and can be seen through the rectangular viewing window on the bottom of the compressor. Check the use-by date regularly and replace the canister after four years of non-use. Do not store the kit unsecured inside the passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a sudden stop or crash. Always store the kit in its original location. After sealant use, the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer. Operating the kit could cause an electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and DVD player operation. Wheels and Tires Sealant compound contains latex. Use appropriate precautions to avoid any allergic reactions. * When inflation only is required for a tire or other objects, the selector must be in the Air E175978 position. Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside assistance. What to do when a Tire Is Punctured 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve. 2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black tube) from the back of the compressor housing. 3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by turning the connector clockwise. Tighten the connection securely. A tire puncture within the tire's tread area can be repaired in two stages with the kit. • • In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound and air. After the tire has been inflated, you will need to drive the vehicle a short distance (about 4 miles [6 kilometers]) to distribute the sealant in the tire. In the second stage, you will need to check the tire pressure and adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle's specified tire inflation pressure. First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air WARNINGS Do not stand directly over the kit while inflating the tire. If you notice any unusual bulges or deformations in the tire's sidewall during inflation, stop and call roadside assistance. If the tire does not inflate to the recommended tire pressure within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside assistance. Do not run the engine during kit operation unless the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area. Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure area, away from moving traffic. E175979 Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the flat tire for visible damage. 4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt power point in the vehicle. 288 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires pressure gauge reading will indicate the tire inflation pressure after about 30 seconds of operation. The final tire pressure should be checked with the compressor turned OFF in order to get an accurate pressure reading. 5. Remove the warning sticker found on the casing/housing and place it on the top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash. 6. Start the vehicle leave the engine running so the compressor does not drain the vehicle’s battery. E175982 E175981 9. When the recommended tire pressure is reached, turn off the kit, unplug the power cable, and disconnect the hose from the tire valve. Re-install the valve cap on the tire valve and return the kit to the stowage area. 10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). 11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and check the tire pressure. See Second stage: Checking tire pressure. 7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant position. Turn the kit on by pressing the on/off button (B). 8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on the tire label located on the driver's door or the door jamb area. The initial air pressure gauge reading may indicate a value higher than the label pressure while the sealing compound is being pumped into the tire. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. The 289 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires 4. If required, turn on the compressor and adjust the tire to the recommended inflation pressure shown on the tire label located on the driver's door or door jamb area. The tire pressure should be checked with the compressor turned OFF in order to get an accurate pressure reading. 5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap on the tire and return the kit to the stowage area. Note: If you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise while driving, reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to the side of the road to call for roadside assistance. Note: Do not proceed to the second stage of this operation. Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure WARNINGS If you are proceeding from the First Stage: Re-inflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air section and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step. What to do after the Tire has been Sealed After using the kit to seal your tire, you will need to replace the sealant canister. Sealant canisters and spare parts can be obtained at an authorized Ford dealer. Empty sealant canisters may be disposed of at home. However, canisters still containing liquid sealant should be disposed of by your local authorized Ford dealer or tire dealer, or in accordance with local waste disposal regulation. The power plug may get hot after use and should be handled carefully while unplugging. Check the air pressure of your tires as follows: Note: After the sealing compound has been used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance is 120 mi (200 km). The sealed tire should be inspected immediately. You can check the tire pressure any time within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing the steps listed previously in the Second stage: Checking Tire Pressure procedure. E175983 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve. 2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose onto the valve stem by turning clockwise. 3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the air position. 290 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Removal of the sealant canister from the kit E175987 4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90 degrees and pull away from casing/housing to remove. E175984 1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black tube) from the compressor housing. Installation of the sealant canister to the kit 1. With the canister held perpendicular to the housing, insert the canister nozzle into the connector and push until seated. 2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down into the housing/casing. E175985 2. Unwrap the power cord. E175988 3. Snap the back cover back into place. E175986 3. Remove the back cover. 291 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires TIRE CARE Important information for 235/40R19 low-profile tires and wheels If your vehicle is equipped with 235/40R19 tires, they are low-profile tires. These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport appearance. With low-profile tires, you may notice an increase in road noise and faster tire wear, depending on road conditions and driving styles. Due to their design, low-profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage from potholes, rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails and curb contact than standard tires and wheels. Note: Your vehicle’s warranty does not cover these types of damage. Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage. E175989 4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black tube) around the channel on the bottom of the housing/casing. E175990 5. Wrap the power cord around the housing and stow the accessory power plug into its storage area. Note: If you experience any difficulties with the removal or installation of the sealant canister, consult your authorized Ford dealer for assistance. Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading Be sure to check the sealant compound’s use-by date regularly. The use-by date is on a label located on the sealant canister and can be seen through the rectangular viewing window on the bottom of the kit. The sealant canister should be replaced after four years of non-use. E142542 292 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Traction AA A B C WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1 ½ times as well on 293 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires *Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code. *Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. *Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. *Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers). Temperature A B C WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Glossary of Tire Terminology * Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. 294 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. *Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. *B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door * Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. * Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. *Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Information on P Type Tires C D B F G H A I J M L K E142543 P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.) Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and 295 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing E Wheels and Tires G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association. B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. 296 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Letter rating mph ( km/h) M 81 mph (130 km/h) N 87 mph (140 km/h) Q 99 mph (159 km/h) R 106 mph (171 km/h) S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) U 124 mph (200 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) Wheels and Tires Letter rating mph ( km/h) W 168 mph (270 km/h) J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades: *Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. Y 186 mph (299 km/h) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. 297 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires *Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc. Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. B A D E142544 B LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below. A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks. B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. 298 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing C Wheels and Tires C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single; defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. B A C D E Information on T Type Tires T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below: A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. 299 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. WARNING Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company. Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label 300 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure and the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. To check the pressure in your tire(s): 1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile. Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (for example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure. 301 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires 3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure. Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. 4. Replace the valve cap. 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T type mini-spare tires, (see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges. Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist: 302 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. Tire Wear Age WARNING Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters) When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently. You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used. Damage U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and 303 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. WARNINGS may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. WARNINGS Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size 304 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels. The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some component of the TPMS may be damaged. WARNINGS When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire: 1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. 2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. 3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the wheel and tire assembly. Safety Practices 4. Use both eye and ear protection. WARNINGS If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the wheel and tire assembly Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle *Observe posted speed limits *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns 305 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires *Avoid potholes and objects on the road *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels. The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. Tire Rotation Note: If your tires show uneven wear, ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. 306 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. Front-wheel drive and all-wheel drive vehicles (front tires on the left side of the diagram) All vehicles with directional tires (front tires on the left side of the diagram) E147237 Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. Summer Tires Your Ford vehicle may be equipped with summer tires to provide superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as All-season or Snow tires, Ford does not recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to approximately 45°F (7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and environmental conditions) or in snow and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire performance E142547 307 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires is affected by tire wear and environmental conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, Ford recommends using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires. USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. USING SUMMER TIRES Summer tires provide superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as All-season or Snow tires, we do not recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to approximately 45°F (7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and environmental conditions) or in snow and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, we recommend using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires. The tires on your vehicle may have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and cables. If you need to use cables, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as cables may chip aluminum wheels. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices Always store your summer tires indoors at temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The rubber compounds used in these tires lose flexibility and may develop surface cracks in the tread area at temperatures below 20ºF (-7ºC). If the tires have been subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC) or less, warm them in a heated space to at least 40ºF (5ºC) for at least 24 hours before installing them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle with the tires installed, or checking tire inflation. Do not place tires near heaters or heating devices used to warm the room where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat or blow heated air directly on the tires. Always inspect the tires after storage periods and before use. • • • • • 308 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions. Use no larger than 15 mm cables or chains ONLY on front axle with 215/60R16 tires. Do not use chains or cables on any other size tires. The snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the front axle. When driving with tire cables do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer, whichever is less. Wheels and Tires • • Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the cables to prevent vehicle damage. Remove the cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use cables on dry roads. when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables, please contact your authorized dealer. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, 309 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle. E142549 To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle. Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system: You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer. Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. 310 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure warning light Possible cause Customer action required Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Flashing warning light It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure When Inflating Your Tires When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires. 311 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure. If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 309). Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have an authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage. Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired. WARNINGS The use of tire sealant may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should only be used in roadside emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used. The tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer after use of the sealant. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 309). 312 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires Important Use of Spare Wheel • • A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types: * 1. T-type mini-spare. Driving With a Full-size Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Do not: • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). • Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time. • Use commercial car washing equipment. • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. 2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on ** wheel. 3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel. * This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall. ** This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY. Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. • Wet weather driving capability. • All-wheel driving capability. Driving with a T-type Mini-spare or Fullsize Dissimilar Spare With Label on Wheel Do not: • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). • Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label. • Tow a trailer. • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire. • Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time. • Use commercial car washing equipment. • Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire. Give additional caution to the following when driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly: • Towing a trailer. • Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body. • Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack. Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible. 313 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wet weather driving capability. All-wheel driving capability (if applicable). Wheels and Tires Changing a Road Wheel Procedure (If Equipped) WARNINGS When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P). To help prevent your vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in park (P), set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. E175447 3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire. For example, if the left front tire is flat, block the right rear wheel. 4. Remove the carpeted wheel cover. 5. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise. 6. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire compartment. Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. If your vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. Note: Passengers should not remain in your vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. E178186 1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers. 2. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off. For vehicles with a manual transmission, place the transmission in reverse ®) after the engine is turned off. 7. 314 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Remove the lug wrench and jack from the spare tire compartment. Wheels and Tires E145908 11. E175694 8. To remove the wrench from the jack, turn the hex nut on the jack counterclockwise. This will lower the jack and loosen the mechanical lock. The vehicle jacking points are shown here, and can be identified by the triangle markings on the molding. The triangle marking may be located on the side or the underside of the molding. The jacking points are identified on vehicles without moldings by a pair of arrows on the metal flange pointing to the jacking point between them. Details are depicted on the warning label on the jack. E224246 E174939 9. If your vehicle has a wheel trim, use the tool supplied to remove it and access the lug nuts. 10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. 12. 13. 315 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Place the jack at the jacking point next to the tire you are changing. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. Wheels and Tires 14. 15. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary spare tire. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 1 4 3 5 2 E75442 16. E176165 316 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Technical Specifications (page 319). Wheels and Tires 17. 18. 19. 3. Install the shorter jack retainer bolt to the jack bolt-down bracket through the centre of the wheel. Finally, wind the wheel retainer down to secure the wheel in place. 4. Place the jack and tools back into the spare tire compartment. 5. Replace the carpeted wheel cover. To store the folded wrench on the jack, engage the bracket of the jack base on the wrench feature as shown. Swing the wrench upward and adjust the height of the jack until the pin engages the hole. Tighten the hex nut clockwise by hand until secure. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench away. Make sure the jack is fastened securely before you drive. Unblock the wheel. Stowing the Flat Tire Using the Retainer Strap (If Equipped) You can temporarily stow the full-size road wheel in the spare tire compartment. Stowing the Flat Tire 1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked inside the jack channel. E224480 2. Locate the jack bolt-down bracket. Push the retainer strap through the jack bolt-down bracket. 3. Put the jack and lug wrench away. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. 4. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the cargo area. 5. Weave the retainer strap through the wheel openings. E227869 You can temporarily stow the full-size road wheel in the spare tire compartment. 1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an angle to access the spare tire compartment. 2. Place the wheel in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down. 317 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires 6. Secure the flat tire by tying a flat knot. E224479 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™/2.0L ECOBOOST™/2.5L Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control. Bolt size Ib-ft (Nm) M12 x 1.5 100 (135) * * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). 318 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires A Wheel pilot bore. Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. E145950 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control. Bolt size Ib-ft (Nm) M14 x 1.5 150 (204) * * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). 319 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Wheels and Tires E145950 A Wheel pilot bore. Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 320 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™ Engine 1.5L EcoBoost engine Cubic inches 92 Firing order 1-3-4-2 Compression ratio 10.0:1 Spark plug gap 0.025-0.029 in. (0.65-0.75 mm) Ignition system Coil on plug Drivebelt Routing E167586 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™ Engine 2.0L EcoBoost engine Cubic inches 122 Firing order 1-3-4-2 Compression ratio 9.3:1 Spark plug gap 0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm) Ignition system Coil on plug 321 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine A B E161383 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L Engine 2.5L engine Cubic inches 152 Firing order 1-3-4-2 Compression ratio 9.7:1 Spark plug gap 0.049-0.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm) Ignition system Coil on plug A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine Drivebelt Routing A B E161383 322 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Measurement Specification Cubic inches 164 Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil in plug Compression ratio 10.0:1 Spark plug gap 0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm) Drivebelt Routing E176088 MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™ Component Motorcraft Part number Air filter element FA-1912 Oil filter FL-910S Battery BXT-90T5-500 * BXT-90T5-590 BAGM-48H6-760 ** Spark plugs SP-539 Cabin air filter FP-71 Windshield wiper blade WW-2601 (driver side) 323 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Component Motorcraft Part number WW-2700 (passenger side) * This part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access. ** This part is designed for vehicles with Automatic-Start-Stop. We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). 324 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™ Component Motorcraft Part number Air filter element FA-1912 Oil filter FL-910S Battery BXT-90T5-590 Spark plugs SP-537 Cabin air filter FP-71 Windshield wiper blade WW-2601 (driver side) WW-2700 (passenger side) We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). 325 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.5L Component Motorcraft Part number Air filter element FA-1912 Oil filter FL-910S Battery BXT-90T5-500 * BXT-90T5-590 * Spark plugs SP-530 Cabin air filter FP-71 Windshield wiper blade WW-2601 (driver side) WW-2700 (passenger side) This part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access. We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). 326 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Component Motorcraft Part number Air filter element. FA-1912 Oil filter. FL-2062 Battery. BXT-94RH7-730 Spark plugs. SP-542 Cabin air filter. FP-71 Windshield wiper blade. WW-2601 (driver side) WW-2700 (passenger side) We recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 477). E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information: The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. 327 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL E142477 A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, Restraint Devices and their locations C Make, vehicle line, series, body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number E167469 The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position. 328 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION E167814 Description Code Six-speed automatic transmission (6FMR). W Six-speed automatic transmission (6F55). C 329 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™ Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter). 4.3 qt (4.1 L) Engine coolant. 10.9 qt (10.3 L) Brake fluid. Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Automatic transmission fluid. 9.0 qt (8.5 L) Windshield washer fluid. Fill as required Fuel tank. 16.5 gal (62.5 L) A/C refrigerant. 18 oz (0.51 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil. * * 5.24 fl oz (155 ml) Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP Recommended motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 WSS-M2C945-A Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-A Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C945-A 330 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W20-QFS Optional motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LFS12 WSS-M2C945-A Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Mexico): Motorcraft® Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-AA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A 331 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 -- If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. 332 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™ Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter). 5.7 qt (5.4 L) Engine coolant. 8.5 qt (8 L) Brake fluid. Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid. 2.4 pt (1.15 L) Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive). Automatic transmission fluid. 9.0 qt (8.5 L) Windshield washer fluid. Fill as required Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive). * 16.5 gal (62.5 L) Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive). 18 gal (68.1 L) A/C refrigerant. 22 oz (0.62 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil. * 11.8 fl oz (0.35 L) 5.24 fl oz (155 ml) Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 333 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP Recommended motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-A Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W30-QFS WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LFS12 WSS-M2C946-A Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid: WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL 334 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-AA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 -- 335 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. E142732 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. 336 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter). 5.7 qt (5.4 L) Engine coolant. 7.8 qt (7.4 L) Brake fluid. * Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Automatic transmission fluid. 9.0 qt (8.5 L) Windshield washer fluid. Fill as required * Fuel tank. 16.5 gal (62.5 L) A/C refrigerant. 24 oz (0.68 kg) A/C refrigerant (E100 engines). 22 oz (0.62 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil. 5.24 fl oz (155 ml) Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP Recommended motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 WSS-M2C945-A Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-A Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W20-QFS WSS-M2C945-A Optional motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LFS12 WSS-M2C945-A Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D2 337 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification VC-3DIL-B Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Mexico): Motorcraft® Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid: WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-AA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: WSS-M2C300-A2 338 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 -- If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. 339 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter). 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant. 11.4 qt (10.8 L) Brake fluid. Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive). 16.0–20.8 fl oz (473–615 ml) Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive). 15.2 fl oz (450 ml)* Automatic transmission fluid. 11.6 qt (11 L)** Windshield washer fluid. Fill as required Fuel tank. 18 gal (68.1 L) A/C refrigerant. 18 oz (0.51 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil. 5.24 fl oz (155 ml) *Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking and filling. **Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 340 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP Recommended Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-A Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W30-QFS WSS-M2C946-A Optional Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LFS12 WSS-M2C946-A Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L 341 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and WSL-M2C192-A Mexico) Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada) WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-75W140-1L Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-AA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B 342 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 -- If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. 343 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. 344 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: • AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz • FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods. CD and CD Player Information Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. MP3 and WMA Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA track mode (system default) and MP3 and WMA folder mode. • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact an authorized dealer for further information. Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached. Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion. 345 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System • • MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present (files with extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, your system may look different from what you see here. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files in the current folder. 346 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System E185815 A VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to adjust the volume. B CD slot: Insert a CD. C TUNE: Turn to search the frequency in individual increments. D Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the next strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward through the current track. E Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. F Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the previous strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move quickly backward through the current track. 347 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, your system may look different from what you see here. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE RADIO Note: Some features, such as Sirius satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E144488 348 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System A CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle. B SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently. C Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information. D Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons to enter a phone number. E Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode). F TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments. G Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. H Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward through the current track. I End phone call: Press this button to end a phone call. J Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. K CD slot: Insert a CD. L Pick-up or Make phone call: Press this button to either pick-up an incoming phone call or to make a phone call. M Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move quickly backward through the current track. N Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD. O VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to adjust the volume. P PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system. See SYNC™ (page 360). Q MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure later in this section. 349 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System R MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port. S Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings. T RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions. U SIRIUS or MUTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Sirius satellite radio, press this button to listen to Sirius satellite radio. If your vehicle is not equipped with Sirius satellite radio, press the button to mute the playing media. Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AM/FM/CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 350 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System E207196 A SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. B CD slot: Insert a CD. C Eject: Press to eject a CD. D TUNE: In radio mode, adjust to manually search through the radio frequency band. E VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. F Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In CD mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. Menu Structure Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options. Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different. Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a menu. Press MENU. Press OK to confirm a selection. 351 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Radio Manual tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band. Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands. PTY/Set Category Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country). RBDS/RDS Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. SIRIUS Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. Show ESN Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). You will need this number when communicating with Sirius to activate, modify or track your account. Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK to open a list of the following options for this channel: Tune Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number. Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN. Set Category Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category. Alerts Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs, artists or teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts. Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations. Skip No stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped. Parental Lock (PIN) Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. 352 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Audio Settings Speed Compensated Volume Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7. Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position. RBDS/RDS Text Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. DSP Choose between the stereo modes. CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections. Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder. CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level. Set Time Select to set the time. Set Date Select to set the calendar date. 24h Mode Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode. Clock Settings Display Settings Dimming Select to change display brightness. Language Select to display the language in English, French or Spanish. Temp. setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius. 353 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. DIGITAL RADIO Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com. When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: • Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast. • Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. 354 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. 355 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Potential station issues Issues Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Cause Action This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. * There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. The previously stored No action required. The multicast preset or direct station is not available in tune is not available in your your current location. current reception area. Text information does not match currently playing audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Fill out the station issue form at website listed below. * There is no text information Data service issue by the shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. frequency. Fill out the station issue form at website listed HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. No action required. This is normal behavior. below. * http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped) SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. 356 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute. SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. E142593 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0. 357 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Audio System Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present. tion key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. SIRIUS system failure No action required. This message should disappear shortly. Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available. Tune to another channel or choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. No Signal The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to your vehicle antenna. The signal is blocked. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. 1-888-539-7474 None found Check Channel Guide Subscription Updated All the channels in the Use the channel guide to selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. function on that station. SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your vehicle. 358 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing No action required. Audio System USB PORT (If Equipped) WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E211463 See your SYNC information. E205592 The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices (if supported). See your SYNC information. MEDIA HUB (If Equipped) You can locate the media hub inside the center console or on the instrument panel. 359 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ GENERAL INFORMATION E198355 • SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows you to: • Make and receive calls. • Access and play music from your portable music player. • Use 911 Assist and applications, such as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC * AppLink. • • • • Use the advanced voice recognition system. Charge your USB device (if your device supports this). * These features are not available in all markets and may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands. Stream music from your connected phone. Text message. Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own. Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST. 360 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. When using SYNC: • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer. In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC. • Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Privacy Information Driving Restrictions When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km). Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. 361 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the section on 911 Assist. See SYNC™ Applications and Services (page 376). USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is around you. Initiating a Voice Session E142599 Press the voice button. A list of available voice commands appears in the display. Global Voice Commands These voice commands are always available. You can say them at any time. Global voice commands (cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You can also cancel a session by holding the voice button for two or more seconds. help This command provides you with hints, examples and instructions. (main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session from the initial starting point. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit. • Helpful Hints • • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish, followed by a single tone. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. • 362 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can cancel a voice session by pressing and holding the voice button. SYNC™ System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback. Adjusting the Interaction Level Press the voice button. When prompted, say: E142599 Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. (Recommended for first time users.) interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guidance. Confirmation Prompts Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there is more than one possible response to your request. To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short question. Phone Confirmation Using phone confirmations the system asks you to verify before placing any calls. 363 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then any of the following: phone confirmation on When enabled, this feature will prompt you to confirm any voice initiated call command prior to the call being placed. phone confirmation off The system will make a best guess; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. • • Changing the Voice Settings In addition to using voice commands to change the voice settings, you can also use the menu in the audio display. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. To change the voice settings press the Menu button then select: Menu Item SYNC-Settings Pairing a Phone for the First Time Voice settings Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR PHONE Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 4000 entries per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Using privacy mode. • Dialing a number. • Redialing. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. Using the Audio System Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. 364 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Call waiting notification. Caller ID. SYNC™ 1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. 2. Press the PHONE button. When the audio display indicates there is no paired phone, select the option to add. 3. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone to start the pairing process. 4. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. Press the voice and when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description (pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone | Bluetooth audio) | add phone) Follow the instructions on the audio display. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional. Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Pairing Subsequent Phones Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. Using Voice Commands Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature E142599 before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. 1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. 2. Press the PHONE button. 3. Select the option for Bluetooth Devices. 4. Press the OK button. 365 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 5. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process. 6. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your device. 7. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. Voice Command 2 join (calls | call) 2 mute call [on] 2 (mute call off | un-mute call) 2 (turn ringer on | silent mode off) (turn ringer off | silent mode [on]) [text] (messages | message) 3 help SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s manual and visit the website. ___ is a dynamic listing that should be the name of a contact in your phonebook. For example you could say "Call Home". 1 See Dial table below. 2 These commands are only valid while in a phone call. Phone Voice Commands E142599 (hold call [on] | place call on hold) Press the voice button. When prompted, say any of the following: 3 See the text message table below. Dial Commands Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the following commands: Voice Command (phone | Blackberry | iPhone) Voice Commands Then say any of the following: 411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one) call (___) 700 (seven hundred) call ___ at home 800 (eight hundred) call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work) 900 (nine hundred) call ___ on (cell | mobile) Clear (deletes all entered digits) call ___ on other dial [[a] number] 1 ([go to] privacy | transfer to phone | privacy on) 2 Delete (deletes last set of digits entered) Number <0-9> 366 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice Commands Voice Command Plus (connect | device) ___ Pound (#) Star (*) Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press any button on the audio system. You can state the name of the desired device, such as “My iPhone”,“My Galaxy” or“My iPod”. SYNC may ask you to confirm the type of device (Phone, USB, or Bluetooth Audio). Making Calls To access text messages say: Voice Command [text] (messages | message) E142599 Then say any of the following: Press the voice button. When prompted, say: (listen to | read) ([text] message) Voice Command forward (text | [text] message) call [[a] name] reply to (text | [text] message) call [sender] dial [[a] number] Phonebook Hints To hear how the SYNC system speaks a name browse phonebook, select a contact and press: SYNC prompts you to say the numbers that you wish to dial. After you say the numbers, the system confirms it. You can then say: Menu Item When the system has stated the number, you say any of the following: Hear it Voice Command (dial | send) This initiates the call. Changing Devices Using Voice Commands (delete | correct) Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch devices say: To end the call, press the end call button on the steering wheel or select the end call option in the audio display. 367 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing This erases the spoken digits. SYNC™ Receiving Calls To use the screen to reject a call select: Accepting calls Menu Item When receiving a call, you can answer the call by pressing the accept call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. Reject Ignore the call by doing nothing. To use the screen to accept a call select: Phone Options during an Active Call Menu Item During an active call, you have more menu features that become available, such as putting a call on hold or joining calls. Accept Rejecting Calls To access this menu, choose one of the options available at the bottom of the audio display or select More to choose from the following options: When receiving a call, you can reject the call by pressing the reject call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. Menu Item Description and action Mic. off Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the microphone on, select the option again. Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is private. Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is on hold. Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad (for example, numbers for passwords). Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty or conference call. 1. Select the More option. 2. Access the desired contact through the system or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, select the More option. 3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button. Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 368 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Menu Item Description and action 4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access your call history log. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. 1. Press the PHONE button to enter the phone menu. 2. Select one of the options available. Accessing Features through the Phone Menu You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages, as well as access phone and system settings. Display Description and action Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad. Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook. 1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use the options at the bottom of the screen to access an alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. 2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection. 3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Speed Dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry, go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad. 369 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Display Description and action Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages. BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on or off, delete). Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone. Note: This is a speed-dependent feature and is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less. Text Messaging Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the audio display indicates you have a new message. SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road. To hear the message you can say: Voice command Receiving a Text Message Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. (listen to | read) ([text] message) Description and action Select this option to have the system read the message to you. Using the screen you also have the following options: Menu Item Description and action Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message inbox. View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For additional options select: More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the following options: 370 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Menu Item Description and action Reply to sender Press the OK button to access, and then scroll through a list of pre-defined messages to send. Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the message. Forward msg. Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can also choose to enter a number. 2. Select the text messaging option, and then press the OK button. Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages 1. Press the PHONE button. Choose from the following options: Menu Item Description and action New Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages. View Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the message. Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your text messages. More... Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all unread messages from your cellular phone. 3. Press the OK button again to confirm when the system asks if you want to send the message. A pre-defined signature appears on each text message. Note: You can send text messages either by choosing a contact from the phonebook and selecting the text option from the audio display or by replying to a received message in the inbox. Sending a Text Message Note: You can only send a text message to one recipient at a time. 1. Select the send option when the desired selection highlights in the audio display. 2. Select the confirmation option when the contact appears. 371 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Accessing Your Phone Settings phonebook, and set up automatic download. These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone and text message notification, modify your 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until the phone settings option appears, and then press the OK button. Scroll to select from the following options: Menu Item Description and action Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone as the master when there is more than one cellular phone paired to the system. This option can be changed for all cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the Bluetooth Devices menu. Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu. Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone option. 1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each ringtone. 2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone. Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to switch the audible tone off or on. Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add, delete or download). Press the OK button to select and scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences table below. 372 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Menu Item Phonebook preferences Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook. Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to the menu for phone settings. Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system. Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since your last download. When automatic download is off, the system does not download your phonebook when your cellular phone connects to SYNC. You can only access your phonebook, call history and text messages when your paired cellular phone connects to the system. Check or uncheck this option to download your phonebook automatically each time your phone connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent. Sorting Pref. Enabling this feature allows you to select how your contacts are displayed. You can select: First/Last name Last/First name 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears, and then press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as set a phone as primary. Select from the following options: Menu Item Add Description and action Pair additional phones to the system. 1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process. 373 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Menu Item Description and action 2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears, select either yes or no. 5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s manual and visit the website. Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair it again. Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone as master by selecting the master option and confirming it as the primary. Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous phone disconnects from the telephone services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio music playback feature at the same time. Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone, you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing process. 2. Select the SYNC settings option, and then press the OK button. System Settings 1. Press the MENU button. 374 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Scroll to select from the following options: Display Description and action Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then press the OK button to change the option's status. Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to factory default settings. Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates. Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation successfully. System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial number. Press the OK button to select. Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See Using Voice Recognition (page 362). Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB device. Press the OK button and use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder. You can select media content for playback from this menu. 375 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (If Equipped) Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone's compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. • 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency. • SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications such as Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is compatible). Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either a voice message plays or a display message or an icon comes on when your vehicle is started and after a previously paired phone connects. These features may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. 911 Assist If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. See Supplementary Restraints System (page 39). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. See Roadside Emergencies (page 231). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. 376 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Setting 911 Assist On or Off • Press Menu then select Menu Item • Action and Description SYNC-Applications 911 Assist Select desired option, on or off. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC then attempts to call the emergency services. If you choose not to activate this feature you will have the following options: Menu Item Action and Description Voice Provides a display and voice Reminder reminder at phone connection ON at vehicle start. Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel". Voice Provides a display reminder Reminder only without a voice reminder OFF at phone connection. To make sure that 911 Assist works properly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • 377 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. SYNC™ 911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps work automatically with no setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. Note: AppLink is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch system. To Access Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the menu on-screen. Then select: SYNC Mobile Apps Menu Item The system enables voice and steering wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled smartphone apps. When an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. Scroll through the list of available applications and select a particular app or select: Find New Apps Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC AppLink app, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Note: Android users need to connect the phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford website. Accessing an App's Menu When an app is running through SYNC, press the right arrow button on the steering wheel control to access the app menu. Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps will vary by region. You can access various app features from here, for example thumbs up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow button on the steering wheel control to exit the app menu. 378 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ To Access Using Voice Commands Press the voice button then when prompted say: Menu Item Action and Description Say the name of the application after the tone. The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip". mobile (apps | applications) help Use this command to discover the available voice commands. SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands The following voice commands are always available: Menu Item Action and Description mobile (apps | applications) SYNC prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC. list [mobile] (apps | applications) SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps. find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible mobile apps. help You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC. When you launch an app using SYNC, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example: • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel consumption, engine speed, rain sensor, odometer, VIN, external temperature, gear position, tire pressure, and head lamp status. • To allow your vehicle to provide driving characteristic information such as, but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, engine revolutions per minute, gear position, braking events, steering wheel angle, and accelerator pedal position. App Permissions App permissions are organized by groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. 379 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ • • To allow your vehicle to provide location information, including: GPS and speed. To allow the app to send push notifications using the vehicle display and voice capabilities while running in a background state. Push notifications may be particularly useful for news or location based apps. Note: You only need to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC. Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve Ford to provide to an app. Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select: Menu Item Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps All Apps You can also select a specific app. If the app supports push notifications, this setting is listed. Select to enable or disable the feature as required. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically. App Status You can view the current status of an app in the settings menu. 380 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ There are three possible statuses: Menu Item Action and Description Update Needed The system has detected a new app requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required. Up-To-Date No update is required. Updating... The system is trying to receive an update. Update settings Menu Item Action and Description Request Update Select this option from the settings menu to manually preform a needed update. Disable Updates Select this option from the settings menu to disable automatic updates. Doing so also disables the use of Mobile Apps on SYNC. Confirm that the USB device has been formatted correctly and has the following specifications: • USB 2.0. • File format must be FAT16/32. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your digital music player over your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, such as artist and album. The format of the audio files on the USB device must be: • MP3. • Non DRM protected WMA. • WAV. • AAC. Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 15,000 songs. SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including: iPod, Zune, plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, make sure you switch it on before plugging it in. 381 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ To Connect Using Voice Commands To Connect Using the System Menu Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports. 1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports. 2. Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display. Press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice Command Action and Description (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. See the media voice commands. Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick. To view USB content select: Message Browse USB Description and Action Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback audio automatically. Message You can browse the files on the USB device in categories. Select BROWSE from the buttons at the bottom of the audio display and choose from the following: Albums Genres Browse USB Message Reset USB Play all Media Voice Commands Playlists Press the voice button and when prompted say: Songs E142599 Artists 382 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice Command Description and Action (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate [player]) voice commands. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or "what is playing". Command pause play Description and Action Pauses device playback. Resumes device playback. play [album] ___ play all Play all media on the device from the first track to the last. play [artist] ___ play [genre] ___ play [playlist] ___ next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the next track on the current media. previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the previous track on current media. [play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the one currently playing. play [song | track | title | file] ___ repeat off repeat (one | track) [on] Repeats the current track. 383 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Command Description and Action shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current playlist in a random order. (Not all devices support this command.) shuffle off ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) At any time during playback, you can press the voice button and ask the system what is playing. The system reads the metadata tags (if populated) of the current track. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles". If we wanted to play the entire album, we can say: Examples of USB Commands Bluetooth Audio SYNC provides the user with many intuitive ways to find and play a song using voice. For example, if we have a song called "Penny Lane" from the album "Magical Mystery Tour" we can say the following to play this song: The system is also capable of playing music from your cellular phone through Bluetooth. • • • • Play album "Magical Mystery Tour". Play "Magical Mystery Tour". To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the MEDIA button (next to the audio display) or Source button, or press the voice button and when prompted say: Play song "Penny Lane". Play "Penny Lane". Voice Command Bluetooth audio Then any of the following: Voice Command pause play next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] 384 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Media Menu Features reset the index of your USB devices. The media menu allows you to select how to play your music (such as by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat), find similar music or Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display to start USB playback. Message Options Description and Action This will enter the media menu. Then any of the following: Message Description and Action Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing. Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any unpopulated metadata tag. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete you can choose what to play from the USB song library. 2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the audio display) to select USB playback. Accessing Your USB Song Library 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Message Browse USB Description and Action This menu allows you to select and play your media files by artist, album, genre, playlist or track. 385 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are media files, you have the following options: Display Play all Description and Action Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time * in numerical order. Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears in the display. Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL, * or MTP). 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the OK button. Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK button. Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists * * and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK button. Albums Sort all indexed media files by album. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the OK button. Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the OK button. Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player connected to the USB port. You can only view media files that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not visible.) 1. Press the OK button to select. * * 386 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Display Description and Action 2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and then press the OK button. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete, you can choose what to play from the USB song library. * You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. USB 2 (If Equipped) Using Voice Commands Your vehicle may come equipped with an additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 is located inside the storage compartment of the vehicle's center console. You can access and view your USB songs using voice commands. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Press the voice button and when prompted, say any of the following commands: You can plug in an additional USB device into the second USB port. You can access both USB devices by using voice commands. Accessing and Viewing USB Media (browse | search | show) all (album | albums) To access a USB device press the voice button and when prompted say: (browse | search | show) all (artist | artists) Voice command USB 1 (browse | search | show) all (genre | genres) USB 2 (browse | search | show) all (playlist | playlists) Note: SYNC only supports one connected iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever one you plug in first). When you connect a second iOS device, the systems charges it, but does not support playback from it. (browse | search | show) all (song | songs | title | titles | file | files | track | tracks) (browse | search | show) album ___ Bluetooth Devices and System Settings (browse | search | show) artist ___ (browse | search | show) genre ___ You can access these menus using the audio display. See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 364). (browse | search | show) playlist ___ 387 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice Commands for Audio Sources Voice Command ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command. help E142599 * Press the voice button and when prompted say: If equipped. Radio Voice Commands Voice Command If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button, and then E142599 say any of the commands in the following table. (music | audio | entertainment) [system] Below are a few examples of voice commands you can use. If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) Voice Command Radio [tune [to]] AM 2 Bluetooth (audio | stereo) You can then say any of the following commands. (disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] AM 2 [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM]) Radio [tune [to]] AM preset ___ tune [to] SAT * [tune [to]] AM1 preset ___ Sirius * [tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] FM1 (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) preset ___ 388 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice Command Voice Commands [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___ [tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM]) [tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___ [tune [to]] FM preset ___ FM ___ HD ___ tune [to] [Sirius] Help * [tune [to]] Sirius [channel] ___ [tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___ HD ___ * You can say the channel number (0233) to listen to that Sirius station. [tune [to]] preset ___ CD Voice Commands Tune If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button, and then say any of the commands in the following table. help * E142599 If equipped. Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands (If equipped) E142599 If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: To listen to Sirius satellite radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: Voice Command (disc | CD [player]) play Voice Commands You can then say any of the following commands. Sirius pause When you are listening to Sirius satellite radio, you can press the voice button, and say any of the commands in the following table. play [play] next track [play] previous track Voice Commands tune [to] SAT [play | change to] track [number] ___ [tune [to]] SAT 1 repeat (track | song) [on] [tune [to]] SAT 2 repeat folder [on] [tune [to]] SAT 3 repeat off [tune [to]] preset ___ (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks | songs) [on]] [tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___ 389 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information. Voice Command (shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | disc) [on] (shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] shuffle off SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below. Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) There is excessive background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your phone may be affecting SYNC performance. Review your phone's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. SYNC is not able to download my phonebook. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website. The system says Phonebook Try pushing your phonebook Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. the Add Contacts feature. empty or missing contacts. 390 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to the device memory. Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact. Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm when prompted by your phone during the phonebook download. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting SYNC from your device and trying again. I am having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. Update your device's firmware. 391 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting. Text messaging is not working on SYNC. This is a phone-dependent feature. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. I am having trouble connecting my device. This may be a possible device malfunction. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly into the device and the USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an autoinstall program or active security settings. SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car. Bluetooth audio does not stream. This is a device limitation. Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures. Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your feature. phone supports the Bluetooth audio streaming function. 392 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The device is not connected. Make sure you correctly connect the device to SYNC, and that you have pressed play on your device. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre information. SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device. Make sure that all song details are populated. The file may be corrupted. The song may have copyright protection, which does not allow it to play. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class. Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Review the phone voice commands and the media You may be using the wrong voice commands at the voice commands. beginning of their respective sections. SYNC does not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. Review the media voice SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong commands at the beginning the name of a song or artist. voice commands. of the media section. 393 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You may be saying the name differently than the way you saved it. Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you say "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. Make sure you are saying the complete title, such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to The system may not be say "L-O-L-A". reading the name the same way you are saying it. Do not use special characters in the title. The system does not recognize them. Review the Phone voice commands at the beginning of the phone section. You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are voice commands. listed. For example, if you save a contact as Joe SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe or is calling the wrong Wilson". contact when I want to Using the SYNC phone make a call. menu, open the phonebook and scroll to the name You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble name differently than the understanding. SYNC will way you saved it. read the name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation SYNC is expecting. 394 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it. The system works better if you list full names, such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe". Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as may be very short and similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them. special characters. Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS. If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it. JAKE requires you to say "Call JA-K-E". AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone paired and connected to New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC. SYNC in order to find find any applications. AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's USB port with an Apple USB cable. Ensure you have downloaded and installed the AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app My phone is connected, but not installed and running on from your phone's app store. I still cannot find any apps. your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or 395 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then restart the app. If the app does not have that option, you can also manually "Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.' over ignition cycles, for cannot find any apps. Don't forget to restart the example. app afterwards, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile App's Menu. My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth bug on some order versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off Bluetooth. 396 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by turning it off and then turning Bluetooth back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. SYNC™ AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable My iPhone phone is back in to the phone. After a connected, my app is The USB connection to few seconds, the app should running, I restarted the app SYNC may need to be reset. appear in SYNC's Mobile but I still cannot find it on Apps Menu. If not, "Force SYNC. Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. The bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. Some Android devices have a limited number of bluetooth ports apps can I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of phone listed in SYNC's available Bluetooth ports, Mobile Apps Menu. you will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC's mobile apps menu. Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. SYNC System Reset The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC system. 397 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Getting to Know Your System GENERAL INFORMATION The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact with a variety of features using the touchscreen and voice commands. By integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled phone, the touchscreen provides easy interaction with audio, multimedia, climate control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC 3 compatible apps. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Using the Touchscreen To operate the touchscreen, you can simply touch the item or option that you want to select. The button changes color when you select it. The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly select the feature you wish to use. E205444 398 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Menu Item Action and Description A Status Bar This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages. B Home This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view. C Clock This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See Settings (page 448). D Outside Temperature This displays the current outside temperature. E Feature Bar You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature. The Status Bar The touchscreen allows you quick access to all of your comfort, navigation, communication and entertainment options. Using the status and feature bar you can quickly select the feature you want to use. Additional icons also display in the status bar depending on market, vehicle options and current operation. If a feature is not active, the icon does not display. Certain icons may move to the left or right depending on what options are active. Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off (and no doors open). 399 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 E223130 Callout Item Description A Driver Temperature This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system. B Heated steering wheel When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering wheel. (If equipped) C Passenger Temperature When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are linked, the passenger's temperature does not display. D Microphone Mute This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you. E Mute This icon displays when the audio system is muted. 400 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Callout Item Description F Download This icon appears when SYNC 3 has received a software update. Pressing the icon shows more details about the new software. G Wi-Fi This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected. H Wi-Fi in Range An available Wi-Fi network is within range. I Roaming This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming. J Text Message This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone. K 911 Assist Off This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC. L Bluetooth Alert The Bluetooth alert icon displays when there is an active Bluetooth alert. M Bluetooth This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth connection. Messages may also appear in the status bar to provide you with notifications. You can select the message to view the associated feature. Feature Bar Feature Bar Item Functions Audio Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs, and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB connection. Climate Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within the vehicle. Phone Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook of your connected device. 401 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Feature Bar Item Navigation (If equipped) Functions Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along your route. Apps Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped). Settings You can customize your system with various settings for the touchscreen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact with your vehicle. The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request. Cleaning the Touchscreen You can remove fingerprints with a dry, clean, soft cloth. When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the status bar indicating the status of the voice command session. See Using Voice Recognition (page 412). If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth and try to clean it again. Note: Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen. Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Vehicle Information Display (If Equipped) Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen. Using Voice Recognition Depending on your vehicle and selected options you may be able to control some of the SYNC 3 features on your information display. The features are visible in the right hand display (A). Using voice commands allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings). 402 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 E208626 You can make the following adjustments using the information display SYNC 3 screen: Option Audio Information Information for current audio playing. Select source. Navigation View current road and speed limit (if information is available). View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to cancel route. If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown. Phone If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: * 403 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Option Information Quick dial All calls Incoming calls Outgoing calls Missed calls If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display. If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls. * Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display. Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press again to stop the voice prompt and immediately begin speaking. Press and hold to end a voice session. Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll through the available modes. The selection menu expands and different options appear. • Press the up and down arrows to scroll through the modes. • Press the right arrow to enter the mode, use the left arrow to exit the mode. • Press the up and down arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode. • Press OK to confirm your selection. SEEK NEXT: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. SEEK PREVIOUS: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, compass appears in the display instead of navigation. If you press the right arrow to go into the compass menu, you can see the compass graphic. The compass displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling, not true direction (for example, if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of the compass graphic displays west; north displays to the left of west though its true direction is to the right of west). PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or switch between calls. PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject an incoming call. Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE ACCEPT. Using the Steering Wheel Controls Depending on your vehicle and option package, you can use different controls on your steering wheel to interact with the touchscreen system in different ways. M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media sources (modes). VOL: Control the volume of audio output. Using Your Bezel Controls Mute: Mute the audio output. Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these controls on your instrument panel: See Steering Wheel (page 67). 404 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 • • • • • • • • • Power: Switch the audio system on and off. VOL: Control the volume of playing audio. Seek and Tune: Use as you normally would in audio modes. Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system. SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to advance through available media modes. SOUND: Press to access the Sound menu where you can adjust sound and other audio settings. 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory preset. See Audio System (page 345). DISP: Switch the display on or off. You can also touch the screen to switch the display back on. Temperature, fan and climate control buttons: Control the temperature, fan speed or settings of the climate control system. See Climate Control (page 117). WARNINGS Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar. Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. 911 Assist If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting: WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca 405 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel." Website www.syncmaroute.ca For important information about airbag deployment and the fuel pump shut-off please see the Supplementary Restrains and Roadside Emergencies sections of your owner manual. To switch 911 Assist on and off please view the settings information. See Settings (page 448). If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. • The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services. 406 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. SYNC™ 3 Safety Information • WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. • • • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's user guide for further information. For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC 3. Speed-restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary. Do not attempt to service or repair the system. Have an authorized dealer check your vehicle. Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • • • Screens crowded with information, such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link sports scores, movie times or ski conditions. Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as entering a navigation destination or editing information. All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries). See the following chart for more specific examples. Restricted features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone. Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls. System Functionality Editing the keypad code. Enabling Valet Mode. Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active. 407 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Restricted features Wi-Fi Editing Wi-Fi settings. Editing the list of wireless networks. Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network. Text Messages Viewing received text messages. Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination. Demo navigation route. Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas. is supported by Android and iPhone and it is available through the App Store and Google Play. The MyFord mobile app is available through a free download. Services included for four years. Text and data rates apply to usage. Creating a SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • • • Essential for keeping up with the latest software and connected features. Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Maintain account permissions. • • Updating Your System Visit the website to sign up and register. You can choose to download the update onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic updates. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca USB Updates To use the USB update you need to log into your owner account and visit the SYNC software update page. MyFord Mobile™ with Embedded Modem (If Equipped) Website Connect to your vehicle using the MyFord Mobile app on your smartphone. The embedded modem in your vehicle communicates with the app and allows you to start, lock, unlock and locate your vehicle remotely. The app also connects you with other vehicle resources like a parking locator, roadside assistance, dealer locations and Ford Support. MyFord Mobile www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca The website notifies you if an update is available. You can then select to download the update. 408 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing FCC: LHJ-FAN IC: 2807E-FAN SYNC™ 3 You must also give the system permission to update automatically. Upon vehicle delivery, the System asks you if you would like to use the automatic update feature. If you agree to automatic updates, you can press OK to confirm. If this selection does not appear upon vehicle delivery you can access it through the General Settings. See Settings (page 448). You can also perform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 460). You will need an empty USB drive. Please check the website for minimum requirements. Once you have inserted the USB drive into your computer, choose to start the download. Follow the instructions provided to download the files to the USB drive. The installation of most files occurs in the background, and does not interrupt your use of the system. Navigation updates cannot be installed in the background, because the files are too large. If you would like to switch this feature on later, select: To install the update in your vehicle, remove anything that is plugged in the USB ports on the media hub and plug in the USB drive containing the update. When the USB drive is plugged in, the installation should begin immediately. After a successful installation, the update is available the next time the vehicle is started. Menu Item Settings General Automatic System Updates Please refer to the website for any further actions. Updating Over Wi-Fi To update your System over Wi-Fi your vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi access point. Data rates may apply. When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are enabled, your system checks for software updates periodically. If a new version is available, it downloads at that time. Software downloads can take place for up to 30 minutes after you have switched your vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download does not complete for any reason, the download continues where it left off at the next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon activation of an update, a banner displays on the touchscreen indicating the system update. Select the icon to see more detail. This icon displays for two ignition cycles. To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select: Menu Item Settings Wi-Fi Available Wi-Fi Networks You can then select your Wi-Fi network. You may have to enter the security code if the network is secured. The system confirms when it has connected to the network. 409 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing From this menu, you can enable automatic updates. If you have not done so already, the system prompts you to set up a Wi-Fi connection when you enable this feature. SYNC™ 3 unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. To switch this feature off: Menu Item Settings General Automatic System Updates In this menu selection, you can change the selection for automatic updates to OFF. The cellular profile, media device index, and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you are not able to answer on your own. If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. You can find more information about the Master Reset in General Settings. See Settings (page 448). System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST. United States: 1-800-392-3673. Canada: 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. Privacy Information When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This profile helps in offering you more cellular features and operating more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and 410 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 HOME SCREEN E205446 Item Tile Home screen display A Audio Shows the active media source. If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass. B Phone The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging and roaming. C Navigation * This map displays your current location or current route in real time. When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and distance to your destination. 411 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Tile Home screen display If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information. * If equipped. You can access each feature controlled by SYNC 3 through a variety of commands. You can touch any of the feature displays to access that feature. To activate the SYNC 3 voice commands push the voice E142599 button on the steering wheel and wait for the prompt. Anytime you select the home button, the system returns you to this screen. USING VOICE RECOGNITION ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can be the name of anything, such as artist, the name of contact or number. The context and the description of the command tell you what to say for this dynamic option. The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice commands, to control features like audio and climate controls. By using voice commands, you can keep your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road. Voice Command There are some commands that work for every feature, these commands are: Action and Description Main Menu Brings you to the main menu. Go back Returns you to the previous screen. Cancel Ends the voice session. List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands. ___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For example, you could say: Phone List of Commands Navigation List of Commands Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen. 412 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Audio Voice Commands Included here are some of the most popular commands for each SYNC 3 feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for audio voice commands it can be the name of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a radio frequency number, or the name of an artist, album, song or a genre. To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Sirius Channel ___ Description * AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "88.7 FM" or "1580 AM". FM ___ FM ___ HD ___ You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16". You can also just say the name of a Sirius station such as "The Pulse". * Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “88.7 FM HD 1”. Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetoothconnected device. USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device. Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song, Penny Lane". Play Playlist ___ Play Artist ___ Play Album ___ Play Podcast ___ Play Song ___ Play Audiobook ___ Browse ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk". * This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription. 413 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Climate Voice Commands ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for climate voice commands it can be the desired degrees for the temperature setting. You can control the temperature of the vehicle using voice commands. To adjust the temperature, say: Voice command Description Climate Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 59.0°F (15°C)-86.0°F (30°C). Climate Help Phone Voice Commands Pairing a Phone You can use voice commands to connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the system. To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Pair Phone Description Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 448). Making Calls ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for phone voice commands it can be the name of the contact you wish to call or the digits you want to dial. Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following: Voice command Description Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny". Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home". Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”. 414 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Please make sure that you are saying the contact name exactly as it appears in your contact list. Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands: Voice Command Description <0-9> If the full number was not entered with the first command, you can continue saying the number. Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call. Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated. Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number. Text Message Voice Commands To access text message options, press the voice button and say: Voice command Description Listen to Message Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you would like to hear. Reply to Message ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for navigation voice commands it can be a POI category or an address. Navigation Voice Commands Setting a Destination You can use any of the following commands to set a destination or find a point of interest. You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category: Voice command Description Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality. Find a ___ State the name of the POI category you would like to search for such as "Find restaurants". Find POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality. 415 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command Description Find Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality. Destination Nearest ___ State the name of the POI category you would like to search for nearby such as "Destination nearest restaurants". Destination Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations. Destination Destination Home Allows you to route to your home address. In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active: Voice command Description Cancel Route Cancels the current route. Detour Allows you to select an alternate route. Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt. Show Route Displays the active route. Where Am I Provides current location. Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map. Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map. Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped) The following voice commands are always available: Voice command Description Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3. List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps. Find New Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. 416 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3: Voice command Description Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the app mobile app on SYNC 3. Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app, followed by app if the app is running on SYNC 3. help SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Activation and a subscription are required. You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link: Voice command Show Traffic Description Displays a list of traffic incidents. Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map. Show Fuel Prices Displays a list of fuel prices. Show 5 Day Forecast Displays the 5 day weather forecast. Help Voice Settings Commands You can say the following commands to access the voice settings: Voice command Description Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality. Interaction Mode Standard Sets standard prompting with longer prompts. Interaction Mode Advanced Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts. Phone Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call. 417 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command Phone Confirmation Off Description The system does not confirm before placing a call. Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands. Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands. Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. Fan speed can also be adjusted normally during a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan speed to desired setting. To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence. 418 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 ENTERTAINMENT E205443 Message You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands. Message and description A Sources Sources B Direct Tune C Presets Press this button to select the source of media you want to listen to. Menu item AM FM SIRIUS * CD * USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here. 419 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu item Bluetooth Stereo Apps If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections. * This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. Once you have entered the station's call numbers, you can select: AM/FM Radio Tuning a Station Menu item You can use the tune or seek controls on the radio bezel to select a station. Action and description Enter Press to begin playing the station you have entered. Menu item Cancel Press to exit without changing the station. A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of a station. You can only enter a valid station for the source you are currently listening to. Presets To tune a station using the touchscreen, select: Direct Tune To set a new preset, tune to the station and then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and then returns. You can press the backspace button to delete the previously entered number. There are two preset banks available for AM and three banks for FM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated) Note: This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. 420 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. E142593 SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. This includes canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. The following buttons are available for Sirius: Menu item Action and description Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations. Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station. Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select: Enter The system tunes to the station you select. Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play. You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number. 421 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu item Replay Action and description Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio. When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you to the live broadcast. Live ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel. Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 448). There are three preset banks available for SIRIUS. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. Memory Presets To set a preset, tune to the station then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and returns once the station is stored. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. See Settings (page 448). SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interference Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute. 422 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting tips Message Acquiring Signal Cause Action Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or system failure present. SIRIUS system failure Invalid Channel No action required. This message should disappear shortly. If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or able. choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-5397474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. Satellite acquiring signal… The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS you move into an open area, tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call 1888-539-7474 Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-5397474 to resolve subscription issues. None found. Check channel guide. All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on locked. that station. SIRIUS Subscription updated SIRIUS has updated the chan- No action required. nels available for your vehicle. HD Radio™ Information (If Available) To activate HD radio, please see the Radio Settings in the Settings Chapter. See Settings (page 448). Note: This feature may not be available in all markets. Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. 423 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit: The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital station, and then changes to orange when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. Website www.hdradio.com Note: There is also an additional feature for stations that have more than 1 HD multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this button allows you cycle through all of the HD stations on that specific frequency. For example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly causes the radio to cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic increasing order. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen: E142616 When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: Message Presets Action and description Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. 424 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. Potential station issues Issues Cause Action Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Sound fading or blending in and out. The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio. There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. 425 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. SYNC™ 3 Potential station issues Issues Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. Cause Action The previously stored multicast No action required. The station preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current available in your current recep- location. tion area. Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. not match currently broadcaster. * playing audio. There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. information shown for broadcaster. * currently selected frequency. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. Website http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ report_radio_station_experiences CD (If equipped) Once you select this option, the system returns you to the main audio screen. The current audio information appears on the screen. * You can find the form here: The following buttons are also available: Button Function Browse You can use the browse button to select a track. Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat. For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays). Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order. You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. 426 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Bluetooth Stereo or USB access media that you store on your Bluetooth device or USB device such as music, audio books or podcasts. Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB: Button Function Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number one). Shuffle Play the tracks in random order. For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide 30-second skip buttons when you listen to audio books or podcasts. These buttons allow you to skip forward or backward within a track. You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. To get more information about the currently playing track, press the cover art or Info button. While playing audio from a USB device you can look for certain music by selecting the following: Button Function Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist. New Search This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories. Play All Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Podcasts Audio books 427 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Function Composers A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the category you are browsing. Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your USB device. Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information USB Port The system is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including iPod, iPhone, and most USB drives. Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. Supported audio file extensions include MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC. Supported USB file systems include: FAT, exFAT, and NTFS. E229068 SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media from your USB device by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files, provide information about the file. The USB port is on the instrument panel. This feature allows you to plug in USB media devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this feature. If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty metadata tags as unknown. Select this option to play audio from your USB device. Apps SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices. The system supports the use of certain audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or bluetooth-enabled device. Each app gives you different on-screen options depending on the app's content. See Apps (page 445). 428 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 may look different from one of the screens shown below. Your screen may not contain all of the features shown. CLIMATE Touch the climate button on the touchscreen to access your climate control features. Depending on your vehicle line and option package, your climate screen Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See Settings (page 448). E206820 A Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature. B Heated steering wheel: Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on. Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about 5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F in temperatures as low as -4°F. The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F and operates independently from the heated seats and other climate-control functions. The heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel. 429 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel may also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your vehicle off. Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions. C Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options. MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the driver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 125). D AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. E Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. F DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch the off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch the DUAL button. Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically turn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature. G Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature. H Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that circulates in your vehicle. Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX A/C. I A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options. MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. 430 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioning A/C button off. Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the interior. Note: Recirculatied air may turn off automatically (or the system may preventit from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. J Manual airflow distribution controls: Select these controls individually, together, or with Defrost to direct the air flow to the area you desire. Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time PHONE Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. Hands-free calling is one of the main features of the system. Once you pair your cell phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone’s functionality. 431 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. At a minimum, most cell phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Dialing a number. • Call waiting notification. • Caller identification. Alternatively, to add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. Then select: Discover Other Bluetooth Devices To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website: 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. Websites owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Phone Menu This menu becomes available after pairing a phone. 432 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 E205447 Item A Menu Item Recent Call List Action and Description Displays your recent calls. You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list. You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You can choose: All B Contacts Incoming Missed All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order. A-Z Jump C Outgoing Selecting this button allows you to choose a specific letter to view. Phone Settings Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options. From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts. See Settings (page 448). 433 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Menu Item Action and Description D Text Messages Displays all recent text messages. E Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number. Use the backspace button to delete numbers. Call F Press this button to begin a call. Do Not Disturb Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail. New text message notifications are not displayed on the screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent. Users with phones having voice services may see a button to access the feature. For example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A press and hold of the voice button on the steering wheel also accesses this feature. Making Calls There are many ways to make calls from the SYNC 3 system, including using voice commands. See Using Voice Recognition (page 362). You can use the touchscreen to place calls as well. 434 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 To accept the call, select: To call a number in your contacts, select: Menu Item Contacts Menu Item Action and Description Accept You can then select the name of the contact you want to call. Any numbers stored for that contact display along with any stored contact photos. You can then select the number that you want to call. The system begins the call. Note: You can also accept the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To reject the call, select: Menu Item Reject Note: You can also reject the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To call a number from your recent calls, select: Menu Item Action and Description Recent Call List You can then select an entry that you want to call. The system begins the call. Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3 logs it as a missed call. During a Phone Call During a phone call, the contacts name and number display on the screen along with the call duration. To call a number that is not stored in your phone, select: Menu Item The phone status items are also visible: • • • Action and Description Phone Keypad Select the digits of the number you wish to call. Call The system begins the call. You can select any of the following during an active phone call: Pressing the backspace button deletes the last digit you typed. Receiving Calls During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Caller information appears in the display if it is available. 435 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Signal Strength. Battery. 911 Assist (United States and Canada Only). See Settings (page 448). SYNC™ 3 Item Item End Call Privacy Immediately end a phone call. You can also press the button on the steering wheel. Transfer the call to the cell phone or back to SYNC 3. Text Messaging Keypad Press this to access the phone keypad. Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are cell phone-dependent features. Mute You can switch the microphone off so the caller does not hear you. Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h). Receiving a Text Message When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select: Menu Item Action and Description Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you. View View the text on the touchscreen. Call To call the sender. Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully. Close To exit the screen. Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disables some SYNC 3 features. SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and Android Auto to access your phone. Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto features use mobile data. When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, you can: • Make calls. • Send and receive messages. • Listen to music. • Use your phone's voice assistant. Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer with iOS 7.1 or newer (Ford recommends updating to the latest iOS version). To enable this feature, plug your phone into a USB port and select Apple CarPlay on your SYNC 3 screen. See Media Hub (page 359). 436 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 To disable Apple CarPlay on your iPhone, go to your SYNC 3 Settings and select: Menu Item Android Auto Preferences Menu Item Your device is listed if SYNC detects Android Auto. Select the name of your device and select: Apple CarPlay Preferences Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your device and select: Disable To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the bottom of the screen and then select the option to return to SYNC. Disable To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC app. NAVIGATION (If Equipped) Android Auto Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination mode and map mode. Android Auto is compatible with most devices with Android 5.0 or newer. Download the Android Auto app to your device from Google Play to prepare your device (this may require mobile data usage). To enable this feature, plug your device into a USB port and select Android Auto on your SYNC 3 screen. See Media Hub (page 359). Map Mode Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks and 3D city models (when available). 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use, landscape features, and detailed railroad infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe. To disable Android Auto on your device, go to your SYNC 3 Settings and select: 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourism value. 3D city models are complete 3D models of entire city areas including navigable roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D landmarks and city models appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage of these varies and improves with updated map releases. 437 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Select the zoom in icon to see a closer view of the map. E207752 E207751 Select the zoom out icon to see a farther away view of the map. Points of Interest (POI) grouping icon: You can choose up to three POI icons to display E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs are located close together or are at the same location a box is used to display a single category icon instead of repeating the same icon, in order to reduce clutter. When you select the box on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how many POIs are in this location. Select the pop up to see a list of the available POIs. You can scroll through and select POIs from this list. E207753 You can adjust the view in preset increments. You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the map. The information bar tells you the names of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over them with the crosshair curser. You can change your view of the map by tapping on the location indicator icon on the right hand side of the screen. You can choose from the following options: E207750 Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle’s current location. If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel, station icons automatically display on the map. Heading up (2D map) This always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km). If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow will be indicated on the map by green (clear), yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the information is available and varies across the US. North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen. E207749 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map. Adjust this viewing angle and rotate the map 180 degrees by E207748 touching the map twice, and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map. You can choose to display traffic icons on the map representing twelve different types of incidents. See Settings (page 448). You can set a destination by hovering above a location and selecting: Button Start 438 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Destination Mode To set a destination, press: Menu Item Description Destination Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats: Search Street Address (number, street, city, state) For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI" Partial Address (number, street) if searching in current state (number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane". City (name or zip code) Point of Interest (name or category) Intersection (street 1 / street 2) (street 1 and street 2) (street 1 & street 2) (street 1 @ street 2) (street 1 at street 2) Latitude and Longitude (##.###### , ##.######) One to six decimal places are accepted. You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type. If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections. Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here. tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination. 439 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Description These locations cannot be deleted individually. To delete them, preform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 460). Home Select to navigate to your set Home destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays. To set your Home, press: Home A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Work Select to navigate to your set Work destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays. To set your Work: Work A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Favorites Favorites include any location you have previously saved. To add Favorites: Add a Select this button and enter a location into the destination Favorite bar. Search Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered. Save Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen. The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the favorites screen. Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle (POI) Categories configuration): Food Fuel hotel ATM 440 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Description See All Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking for. Inside of these categories you can search by: Nearby Along Route Near Destination In a City Once you have chosen your destination, press: Menu Item Action and Description Save This saves the destination to your favorites. Start This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options. Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads possible. Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible. Economical Route Uses the most fuel-efficient route. The time and distance for each route also displays. Cancel On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode screen. Once you have chosen you destination, press: Menu Item Start Action and Description The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination. During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving. 441 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your destination. SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually. During active navigation, touch the bottom of the screen to view the menu and other buttons. Navigation Menu In map mode and during active navigation you can access the navigation menu. To access the Navigation menu, press: Button Menu You can then select: Screen View Full Map A full screen map displays during navigation. Highway Exit Info Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation. Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations. You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired. Turn List Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route. You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears and you can press: Avoid The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list. Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present). When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route. 442 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Navigation Settings Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 448). Where Am I? Provides your current location city, longitude and latitude and the nearest road. The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route: Cancel Route The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen. Mute Guidance Selecting this option switches off the audio navigation guidance. Press the button again to un-mute guidance. View Route Press this to see a map of the full route. Detour An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route. Edit Waypoints Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set waypoints. Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints. You can also have the system set the order for you by pressing: Optimize Order To return to Go your route press: 1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass) while on an active route. This brings up the destination menu. 2. Set your destination using any of the given methods. Once the destination has been selected, the screen allows you to set the destination as a waypoint by selecting: Waypoints You can add a waypoint to a navigation route as a destination along your route. To add a waypoint: 443 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Add Waypoint The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the location. You can select up to five waypoints. You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order for you by pressing: To return to your route, press: Go For restaurants, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website address. cityseeker (If Equipped) Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI) information is limited to approximately 1110 cities (1049 in the United States, 36 in Canada and 15 in Mexico). For hotels, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, price category, review, check-in and checkout times, hotel service icons and website address. Hotel service icons include: • • • • • • • • • • E225487 cityseeker, when available, is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants, hotels and attractions. When you have selected a point of interest, the location and information appear, such as address, phone number and a star rating. Attractions include nearby landmarks, amusement parks, historic buildings and more. cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation and admission price. Press More Information to see a photo, a review, a list of services and facilities, the average room or meal price and the web address. This screen displays the point of interest icons. 444 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Restaurant Business center Handicap facilities Laundry Refrigerator 24 hour room service Fitness center Internet access Pool Wi-Fi SYNC™ 3 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Map coverage includes the USA (including Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands), Canada and Mexico. SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available on vehicles equipped with navigation and only in select markets. You must activate and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information. It helps you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see current sports scores. See Apps (page 445). APPS The system enables voice, steering wheel, and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. The system calculates a reasonable efficient route based on available speed limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may know a local short cut that is more efficient at a given time than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight difference in minutes or miles with the SYNC 3 route. Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will vary by market. Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to access AppLink. Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Navigation Map Updates Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit: Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also visit: Websites owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Website www.navigation.com/sync Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps will work automatically with no setup. Other apps will want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available. HERE is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you find map data errors, you may report them directly to HERE by going to www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail. Note: We encourage you to review the smartphone app’s terms of service and privacy policies because Ford is not responsible for your app or its use of data. 445 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system feature. Accessing mobile apps through AppLink is only possible when Android Auto or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps may only be accessible in the car through Applink and others only through Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the Smartphone Connectivity information to disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Note: Ford reserves the right to limit functionality or deactivate mobile apps at any time. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3, the App needs to be running in the background of your phone. If you shut down the app on your phone, it shuts down the app on SYNC 3 as well. Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Menu Item Connect Mobile Apps You can enable and disable apps through settings. See Settings (page 448). App Permissions The system organizes the App permissions into groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. While in the settings menu, you can also see the data included in each group. Action and Description SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example Vehicle information, Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You can enable all groups or none of them during the initial app permissions prompts. The settings menu offers individual group permission control. Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. The connected device sends data to Ford in the United States. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, odometer, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain this data for only as long as necessary to provide this service, troubleshoot, and improve products and services and to offer you products and services that may interest you where allowed by law. Note: You are only prompted to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC 3. Note: If you disable group permissions, apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings menu. 446 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, your vehicle must have navigation. Equipped) WARNING Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features. Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in vehicles. When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, it can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games. Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Menu Item Traffic on Route Traffic Nearby Action and Description Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite places, if programmed. Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route. Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available. Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the chosen area. Map Select to see the weather map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds. 447 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Area Select to choose from a listing of weather locations. Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress. Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area. Sound SETTINGS Pressing this button allows you to adjust the following: Under this menu, you can access and adjust the settings for many of the system features. To access additional settings, swipe the screen left or right. Sound Settings Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels. Treble Adjusts the high frequency level. Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level. Bass Adjusts the low frequency level. Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back. Speed Adaptive Volume Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off. Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners. Sound Settings Stereo Surround Your vehicle might not have all of these features. Media Player This button is available when a media device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is the active audio source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following options for active devices only. 448 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Podcast Speed Action and Description For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose: Slower Normal Faster Audiobook Speed For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose: Cover Art Priority Reset Media Slower Normal Faster Media Player Cover art displays from your device’s music files. If no cover art for the files exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art. Gracenote® The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files. This overrides any cover art from your device. Erase the stored media information in order to re-index. Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database. base Info Device Information This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device. You can adjust the following features: Clock To adjust the time, select the up and down arrows on either side of the screen. The arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows on the right adjust the minute. You can then select AM or PM. Menu Item Action and Description Clock Format Select how time displays. Auto Time Zone Update When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes. This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation. Reset Clock to GPS Time When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time. 449 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Bluetooth The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings. Pressing this button allows you to access the following: Menu Item Bluetooth Action Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit new connections. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Bluetooth-enabled device. The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a device and the available options. Alternatively, to add a phone, select: Phone Menu Item Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. Add Phone Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. Discover Other Bluetooth Devices Then select: 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. 450 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Website To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website: www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Website Once you have paired a device you can adjust the following options. owner.ford.com Menu Item Action and Description View Devices You can then select: Add a Bluetooth Device You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in the previous table. You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options: Connect Disconnect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected device. Device Information Allows you to see phone and device information. Make Primary Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device. Delete Removes the selected device from the system. Menu Item Action and Description Manage Contacts You can then select: Automatic Contact Download On/Off Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to date. Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose: 451 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description First Name Last Name Re-download Contacts Select this option to re-download your contact list manually. Delete Contacts Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone. Menu Item Action and Description Set Phone Ringtone You can then select: No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone. Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting. You can also select one of the three available ringers. Menu Item Action and Description Text Messaging You can then select: No Alert (Silence) No sound plays when a message comes to your phone. You can select one of the three available notification sounds. Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message. 452 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 You can enable and disable the following options as well: Menu Item Action and Description Mute Audio in Privacy When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy. Roaming Warning When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call. Low Battery Notification When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low. Select this button to modify the on or off setting for this feature. If the mobile phone’s contacts have been downloaded, you can adjust the following option: 911 Assist Note: This service is only available in the United States and Canada. Menu Item Action and Description Set Emergency Contacts You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911 Assist call process. Radio This button is available if a Radio source such as AM or FM is the active media source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following features: 453 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item FM HD Radio Action and Description Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts. AM HD Radio (Dependent on current radio source, If Available) Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio text. Autoset Presets Refresh (AST) Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source. Navigation You can adjust many of the Navigation preferences by selecting the following menus. Map Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Map Preferences Then select any of the following: 3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings. Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots. POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. Once this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed by selecting: Incident Map Icons Select POIs This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map. 454 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Route Preferences Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions Route Preferences Then select any of the following: Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type. Shortest Always Use ___ Route Fastest Eco Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred route setting. When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination. Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance. Automatically Find Parking The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination. Eco Time Penalty Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route. Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a Guidance route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible. Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation route. Avoid Toll Roads If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation route. Avoid Ferries/Car Trains If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing a navigation route. 455 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Navigation Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Navigation Preferences Guidance Prompts You can adjust how the system provides prompts. Then select any of the following: Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions. Voice Only Only voice instructions are given. Tones Only Only a tone sounds to prompt you. The connected devices sends data to Ford in the United States. The encrypted information includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically. Mobile Apps You can enable the control of compatible mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Menu Item Mobile Apps Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Action and Description Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu. Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options: Update Mobile Apps This provides information on the current state of available app updates. There are three possible statuses: Update Needed Up-To-Date 456 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Updating Mobile Apps… SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description The system has No update is detected a new app required. requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required. The system is trying to receive an update. Request Update Select this button if an update is required and you want to request this update manually. For example, when your mobile device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select: Request Update All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once. There may also be SYNC 3 enabled apps listed under these options. Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group. Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve Ford to provide to an app. General Access and adjust the system settings, voice features, as well as phone, navigation and wireless settings. Menu Item Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French. Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles. Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit. Touch Screen Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen. Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection. 457 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item About Information pertaining to the system and its software. Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system. Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data. Wi-Fi You can adjust the following: Menu Item Action and Description Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates. View Available Networks This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range. Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may require a security code to connect. When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such as the signal strength, connection status and security type. Wi-Fi Available Notifications The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already connected. Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) You can select the following features to update their settings. Tap a color once to active ambient lighting. This sets the color to the highest intensity. Door Keypad Code Select this button to add or erase a personal door keypad code. To add or erase a personal code, you first need to enter the five-digit factory set code. You can find this code on the owner's wallet card in the glove box or from your authorized dealer. You can drag the colors up and down to increase or decrease the intensity. To switch ambient lighting off, press the active color once or drag the active color all the way down to zero intensity. Vehicle Note: You vehicle may not have all of these features. 458 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Camera Settings To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Camera Settings Then select from the following: Rear Camera Delay You can enable or disable this option using the slider. You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner manual. Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN) Selecting this button on the settings menu shows you the ESN number for your system. You need this number for certain registrations such as Satellite Radio. Display To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Menu Item Action and Description Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer. Mode You can select: Auto Dim Auto The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside light level. Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing. Night The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier. Off The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen. Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions. 459 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice Control You can adjust the voice control settings by selecting the following options. Menu Item Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations. Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts name with you before making a call. Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands when the voice button is pressed. To unlock the system, enter the same pin number. The system reconnects to your phone and all of your options are available again. Valet Mode Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN. SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING When you select valet mode a pop up appears informing you that a four digit code must be entered to enable and disable valet mode. You can use any PIN you chose but you must use the same PIN to disable valet mode. The system asks you to input the code. Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please refer to the tables below. To check your cell phone's compatibility, visit the Ford website. Note: If the system is locked and you cannot remember the PIN, please contact the Customer Relationship Center. Website owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca United States: 1-800-392-3673 Canada: 1-800-565-3673 To enable valet mode, enter your chosen PIN. The system then asks to confirm your PIN by reentering it. The system then locks. 460 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution There is background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your cell phone may be affecting SYNC 3 performance. Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the Possible cell phone other person malfunction. but they cannot hear me. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. During a call, I cannot hear the The system may need to other person be restarted. and they cannot hear me. To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off. This is a cell phonedependent feature. SYNC 3 is not able to download my phone- Possible cell phone book. malfunction. Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone icon on the phone screen. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability. book is empty or is missing contacts. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to your cell phone's memory. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. 461 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause This is a cell phonedependent feature. Possible solution Check your cell phone's compatibility. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. I am having trouble connecting my cell phone to SYNC 3. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your device, then trying again. Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone. Update your cell phone's firmware. Switch the auto download setting off. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. iPhone • • • Text messaging is not working on SYNC 3. • • Go to your cell phone's Settings. Go to the Bluetooth Menu. Press the blue circle to the right of the device named SYNC enter the next menu. Turn Show Notifications on. Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system to activate this settings update. Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3. Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application. Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone. 462 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Audible text messages do not work on my This is a cell phone limitacell phone. tion. Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider and software version. USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3. I am having trouble connecting my device. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's Possible device malfunc- cable. tion. Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your vehicle's USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or active security settings. The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. SYNC 3 does not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold I start my temperatures. vehicle. Bluetooth audio This is a devicedoes not dependent feature. stream. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have started the media player on your device. 463 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution The device is not connected. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated. information. The file may be corrupted. Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version. SYNC 3 does The song may have not recognize copyright protection that music that is on does not allow it to play. my device. The file format is not supported by SYNC 3. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to media transfer protocol class. Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 419). The device needs to be re-indexed. Perform a master reset. See Settings (page 448). The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3. When I connect my device, I To listen to Apple devices through USB, sometimes do This is a device limitation. select AirPlay from the devices Control not hear any Center, then select Dock Connector. sound. To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC. 464 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Wi-Fi Issues Issue Failed connection. Disconnecting after successful connection. Possible cause Possible solution Password error. Verify password. Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal. Multiple Access points within range with the same SSID. Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use the default name unless it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address. Weak signal probably due to distance from the hotspot, obstruction or high interference. Position the vehicle close to the hotspot with the front of the vehicle facing the hotspot direction and remove obstacles if possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones may cause interference. Poor signal seen by SYNC 3 There may be an obstruction If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try despite being near a between SYNC 3 and the positioning the vehicle so hotspot. hotspot. that the windshield is not facing the hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows are tinted, you can open the windows in the direction of the hotspot if that is feasible. Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such as opening the garage door. A hotspot is not listed in the The hotspot was defined as Please set the network to list of available networks. a hidden network. visible and try again. 465 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Wi-Fi Issues Issue Possible cause SYNC 3 is not seen when SYNC 3 does not currently searching for Wi-Fi networks provide a hotspot. from your phone or other devices. Possible solution SYNC 3 currently does not provide a hotspot Software download takes too long. Poor signal strength, too far from the hotspot, hotspot is supporting multiple connections, slow Internet connection or other problems. Check the signal quality (under network details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped hotspot where the environment is more predictable. SYNC 3 seems to connect with a hotspot and the signal strength is excellent but the software is not being updated. It is possible that there is no new software. The connected hotspot may be a managed one and it requires either a subscription or agreeing to the terms and conditions. Test the connection with another device, if the hotspot requires a subscription, you may contact the service provider. AppLink issues Issue AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Find New Apps," SYNC 3 does not find any applications. Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You did not connect an Applink Compatible phone to SYNC 3. Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone 466 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) to SYNC 3 in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable. Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of the app from your phone's app store. Make sure the app is running AppLink-enabled apps are on your phone. Some apps My phone is connected, but not installed and running on require you to register or I still cannot find any apps. your mobile device. login to the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC 3 find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' Sometimes apps do not option, then select it and My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open restart the app. If the app app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC 3, does not have that option, over ignition cycles, for cannot find any apps. select the phone's settings example. menu and select 'Apps', then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.' Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC 3. 467 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu. My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth issue on some older versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you did not switch Bluetooth off. 468 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC 3 should be able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. SYNC™ 3 AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable My iPhone is connected, my back in to the phone. After a app is running, I restarted You may need to reset the few seconds, the app should the app but I still cannot find USB connection to SYNC 3. appear in SYNC 3's Mobile it on SYNC 3. Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and restart it. Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media The Bluetooth volume on app on SYNC 3, but there is the phone may be low. no sound or the sound is very low. Some Android devices have a limited number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to connect. If you I can only see some of the AppLink apps running on my have more AppLink apps on phone listed in the SYNC 3 your phone than the number of available Bluetooth ports, Mobile Apps Menu. you will not see all of your apps listed in the SYNC 3 mobile apps menu. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution You may be using the SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections. Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list of voice commands there. Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command. 469 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section. Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device. For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain". You may not be saying SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it not understand appears on your device. the name of a song or artist. SYNC 3 does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call. The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign names stored on my cell phone. Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N". The song or artist name may have some special characters that are not being recognized by SYNC 3. Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom". The contact name may contain special characters. Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the contact names stored on your cell phone. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE. Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting. 470 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command issues Issue The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign tracks, artists, albums, genres and playlist names from my media player or USB flash drive. Possible cause Possible solution You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC 3. SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names (for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunciation for these artists. The system generates voice prompts and SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt ation of some technology. words may not be accurate for my language. SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded human voice. SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). 471 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing SYNC™ 3 General Issue The language selected for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display does not match the SYNC 3 language (phone, USB, Bluetooth audio, voice control and voice prompts). Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most popular SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the the currently selected language for the instru- current active language. ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages. display. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). SYNC 3 System Reset The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system. For additional assistance with SYNC 3 troubleshooting please call or visit the Ford Website. Ford Support Customer Relation- United States: 1-800-392-3673 ship Center Canada: 1-800-565-3673 Website owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca 472 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Accessories For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site: • • Electrochromatic compass or temperature interior mirrors. Premium carpeted floor mats. Lifestyle Web Address (United States) • • • • • • • • www.Accessories.Ford.com Web Address (Canada) www.Accessories.Ford.ca Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. Peace of Mind • • • • • • Ford Motor Company warrants your vehicle's accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit: • 24 months, unlimited mileage. • The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. Exterior Style Bumper protectors. Graphics. Hood deflector. Rear spoiler. Side window deflectors. Splash guards. Wheels. Interior Style • • All-weather floor mats. Door sill plates. 473 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Bumper-mounted parking sensor*. Keyless entry keypad. Remote start. Roadside assistance kit*. Vehicle security systems. Wheel locks. *Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the accessory manufacturer's limited warranty details and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer. Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. • • • • • • • Ash cup or smoker's packages. Car covers*. Cargo area protectors. Cargo net. Cargo organizers. Interior light kit. Roof racks and carriers*. Tablet cradle*. Accessories For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example, two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer. • Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if their manufacturer did not design them specifically for automotive use. • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. 474 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Extended Service Plan (ESP) PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH FORD PROTECT. Rental Car Reimbursement Ford Protect (U.S. Only) If you bring your car into your dealer for service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the day. 1st day Rental Benefit Ford Protect means peace of mind. It’s the extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides more protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. Extended Rental Benefits If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including bumper to bumper warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions. Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself One trip to the Service Center could easily exceed the price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford Protect you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs. Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including: • Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components • • There are four core Ford Protect with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details. • 1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete it’s probably easier to list what’s not covered. 2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items. 3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. 4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components. Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Protect plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Which should give you and your potential buyer a little more peace of mind. Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle Ford Protect is honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and Mexico. Ford Protect also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. That means you get: • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership. • Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts. Covered maintenance includes: • Windshield wiper blades. • Spark plugs. • The clutch disc. 475 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts. Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage or other transportation. Extended Service Plan (ESP) • • • • • • Brake pads and linings. Shock absorbers. Struts. Engine Belts. Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings. Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment. There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers. Interest Free Finance Options Just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit check or hassles. To learn more, call our Ford Protect Extended Service Plan specialists at 800-367-3377. Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada, the United States and Mexico are not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage. This information is subject to change. For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you. Ford Protect Extended Service Plan P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232 EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA ONLY) You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits such as: • • • • Rental reimbursement. Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items. Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires. Roadside Assistance benefits. 476 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance. We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down. Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs. It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. See Capacities and Specifications (page 321). Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact your dealer for details. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership? Factory-Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received. Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers). 477 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 miles (800 kilometers) of the message appearing. Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 262). Additives and Chemicals If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change intervals. Oils, Fluids and Flushing This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information. In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership, should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex, performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical. Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information. Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six-month intervals. We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle. 478 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Check every month Engine oil level. Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure. Windshield washer fluid level. Check every six months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. Parking brake for proper operation. Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary. Multi-Point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great. 479 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Multi-Point inspection Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation * Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Steering and linkage Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure * ** For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer ** If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed. This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display. Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use. NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how your vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time. 480 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil Interval Vehicle use and example Normal Normal commuting with highway driving No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling 7500-10000 miles (12000-16000 km) Severe Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation 5000-7499 miles (8000-11999 km) Extreme 3000-4999 miles (4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation Normal Maintenance Intervals At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display * ** Change engine oil and filter. Rotate the tires. Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended). Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements. Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake. Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses. Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (AWD only). Inspect the half-shaft boots. Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints. 481 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display * Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth. Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. * Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals. ** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). 1 Other maintenance items Every 20000 miles (32000 Replace cabin air filter. km) Every 30000 miles (48000 Replace engine air filter. km) At 100000 miles (160000 km) Every 100000 miles (160000 km) 2 Change engine coolant. Replace spark plugs. Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3 Change automatic transmission fluid. Every 150000 miles (240000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). 4 Replace timing belt (1.5L engine). 1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. 2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers). 3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced. 4 If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers). 482 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the message appearing in the information display prompting you to change your oil. • Example 1: The message comes on at 28751 miles (46270 kilometers). Perform the 30000-mile (48000-kilometer) automatic transmission fluid replacement. • Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for example, the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers]). Perform the engine air filter replacement. SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD only). Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid. km) Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs. km) 483 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery) As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. Replace engine air filter. Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid. km) Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs. km) Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads) Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. Every 5000 miles (8000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Replace engine air filter. Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 5000 miles (8000 km) or six months * Change engine oil and filter. Perform multi-point inspection. Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid. km) * Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 261). Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only) Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel. 484 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Exceptions Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule: Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change interval is 3000 miles (5000 kilometers). Rear Axle and PTU Maintenance The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (AWD only) in your vehicle does not require any normal scheduled maintenance unless the unit shows signs of leakage. Contact an authorized dealer for service. If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change interval is 1800 miles (3000 kilometers). California Fuel Filter Replacement If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service. Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter Replacement The life of the engine air filter and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 485 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 486 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 487 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 488 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 489 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 490 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 491 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 492 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 493 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 494 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 495 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Description of Other Rights and Limitations END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT • VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) • • You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. • IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. 496 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • • • Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICES. • 497 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the DEVICES. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. 498 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers. General Operation • Voice Command Control: Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road. • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. • Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. • Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. SYNC® Automotive Important Safety Information Read and follow instructions: • Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries. 499 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices • • • Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Risk • You agree to each of the following:(a) Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (i) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and (v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider (WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway. • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in Section (a) – (e) above. substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. 500 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Disclaimer of Warranty CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction • 501 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this EULA. Appendices the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’s award. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver (a) Application. This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration. (f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an individual and use the SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business. The arbitrator (c) Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first. (d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up 502 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices may award the same damages to You individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to You individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy Your individual claim. Arbitration fees and incentives. • • • (h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred. i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts. ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves. (i) Severability. If the class action waiver (Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect. Telenav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. 1. Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: 503 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices 3. Software License (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; • (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). 3.1 License Limitations • You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. 2. Account Information You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that i. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, 504 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. Appendices ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav. • 4. Disclaimers • To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others • 5. Limitation of Liability • 505 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY Appendices REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. 7. Assignment • 6. Arbitration and Governing Law • You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit 8. Miscellaneous 8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or 506 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. Appendices 8.6 conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation". 8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions • 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:: 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. 507 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information. positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. ©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4 Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. No Warranty. This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free. Terms and Conditions Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Restrictions. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR 508 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice: Export Control. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606 Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was provided. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved. 509 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. Gracenote® Copyright CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to 510 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 511 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices TYPE APPROVALS RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) E202555 Brazil E207816 Argentina E207818 European Union EU E207817 Abu Dhabi, Dubai E207819 Jordan E197509 E207820 Malaysia 512 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices E197811 E207822 Moldova Singapore E207821 E198002 Morocco South Africa E198001 Philippines E203899 E197844 Serbia 513 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Appendices E203679 Taiwan E198009 Ukraine 514 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index A Audible Warnings and Indicators.............92 Headlamps On Warning Chime......................92 Keyless Warning Alert.........................................92 Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................92 A/C See: Climate Control...........................................117 Audio Control..................................................68 About This Manual...........................................7 ABS MODE.......................................................................69 Seek, Next or Previous.......................................69 See: Brakes............................................................173 Audio System................................................345 ABS driving hints General Information.........................................345 See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes.................................................................173 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................348 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/ CD...................................................................346 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/ FM/CD..........................................................350 Accessories....................................................473 Exterior Style........................................................473 Interior Style.........................................................473 Lifestyle..................................................................473 Peace of Mind......................................................473 Menu Structure....................................................351 Accessories Autolamps.........................................................74 See: Replacement Parts Recommendation............................................12 Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps.........................................................74 ACC Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System.......................120 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles Without: Sony Audio System.................119 Automatic High Beam Control..................76 See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............195 Active Park Assist.........................................185 Deactivating the Active Park Assist Feature..............................................................189 Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking, Parallel Park Out Assist..............................185 Troubleshooting the System.........................189 Activating the System.........................................77 Manually Overriding the System.....................77 Adjusting the Headlamps..........................271 Automatic Transmission............................163 Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................272 Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................271 Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning.............................................................167 Brake-Shift Interlock Override......................166 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow...................................................................167 SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission...................................................165 Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission.............................163 Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67 Power Tilt and Telescope Steering Column................................................................67 Airbag Disposal...............................................47 Air Conditioning See: Climate Control...........................................117 Air Filter Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 1.5L EcoBoost™/2.0L EcoBoost™/ 2.5L................................................................266 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.7L EcoBoost™........................................267 See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............278 Alarm See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................66 All-Wheel Drive.............................................168 Ambient Lighting...........................................80 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66 Adding Transmission Fluid ............................268 Checking the Transmission Fluid Level ..............................................................................267 Arming the Alarm................................................66 Disarming the Alarm...........................................66 Auto-Start-Stop.............................................151 Appendices...................................................496 Apps.................................................................445 Disabling Auto StartStop.................................152 Enabling Auto StartStop...................................151 ..................................................................................445 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................447 515 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Autowipers.........................................................71 Changing a Bulb...........................................274 Autowipers Settings............................................72 Headlamp.............................................................275 LED Lamps...........................................................275 License Plate Lamp...........................................276 Reversing Lamp..................................................275 Auxiliary Power Points................................142 110 Volt AC Power Point...................................142 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................142 Locations...............................................................142 Changing a Fuse..........................................254 AWD Fuses......................................................................254 Changing a Road Wheel.............................312 See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................168 Changing a Road Wheel Procedure............314 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information.......................................................312 Stowing the Flat Tire..........................................317 Stowing the Flat Tire Using the Retainer Strap....................................................................317 B Battery See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................269 Blind Spot Information System..............207 Changing the 12V Battery.........................269 Changing the Engine Air Filter.................278 Switching the System Off and On..............209 System Errors.....................................................209 Using the System...............................................207 2.5L Engine...........................................................278 EcoBoost Engines..............................................278 Bonnet Lock Changing the Wiper Blades.......................271 Checking MyKey System Status...............56 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........256 Booster Seats..................................................25 Types of Booster Seats......................................26 MyKey Distance....................................................56 Number of Admin Keys......................................56 Number of MyKeys..............................................56 Brake Fluid Check........................................268 Brakes................................................................173 Checking the Wiper Blades......................270 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance..................................................37 Child Restraint Positioning..........................27 Child Safety.......................................................16 General Information...........................................173 Breaking-In.....................................................228 Bulb Specification Chart...........................276 C General Information.............................................16 Cabin Air Filter................................................125 California Proposition 65..............................11 Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™.................................................330 Child Safety Locks.........................................28 Left-Hand Side......................................................29 Right-Hand Side...................................................29 Cleaning Leather Seats.............................283 Cleaning Products.......................................279 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................283 Cleaning the Engine.....................................281 Cleaning the Exterior..................................279 Specifications.....................................................330 Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™.................................................333 Specifications.....................................................334 Capacities and Specifications 2.5L................................................................336 Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................280 Exterior Plastic Parts........................................280 Stripes or Graphics...........................................280 Underbody...........................................................280 Under Hood.........................................................280 Specifications......................................................337 Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™................................................340 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens.........................282 Cleaning the Interior...................................282 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades............................................................281 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56 Specifications......................................................341 Capacities and Specifications.................321 Car Wash See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................279 Center Console..............................................144 Center Console with Rotary Control...........144 516 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Climate............................................................429 Climate Control...............................................117 Climate Controlled Seats..........................135 Driving Hints..................................................228 Driving Through Water...............................228 DRL Cooled Seats........................................................135 See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................76 Coolant Check E See: Engine Coolant Check............................263 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......46 Creating a MyKey............................................55 Economical Driving.....................................228 Electric Parking Brake..................................174 Programming or Changing Configurable Settings...............................................................56 Applying the Electric Parking brake.............174 Battery With No Charge....................................176 Parking On a Hill (Vehicles With a Manual Transmission) .................................................174 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake...........175 Cross Traffic Alert........................................209 False Alerts............................................................212 Switching the System Off and On................212 System Errors.......................................................212 System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts....................................................................211 System Limitations.............................................211 Using the System..............................................209 Emission Control System..........................160 Cruise Control.................................................69 End User License Agreement.................496 Principle of Operation.......................................194 Type 1........................................................................69 Type 2.......................................................................69 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................496 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................161 Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing....................................................162 Engine Block Heater....................................149 Cruise control Using the Engine Block Heater......................150 See: Using Cruise Control................................194 Engine Coolant Check...............................263 Customer Assistance.................................238 Adding Coolant...................................................263 Engine Coolant Temperature Management..................................................266 Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................265 Recycled Coolant..............................................264 Severe Climates.................................................264 D Data Recording..................................................9 Event Data Recording..........................................10 Service Data Recording........................................9 Engine Immobilizer Daytime Running Lamps.............................76 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65 Type 1 - Conventional (Non-Configurable)........................................76 Type 2 - Configurable..........................................76 Engine Oil Check...........................................261 Adding Engine Oil...............................................261 Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L EcoBoost™..................................................261 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/ 2.5L/2.7L EcoBoost™..............................261 Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™..................................................321 Digital Radio..................................................354 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting............................................355 Direction Indicators........................................78 Driver Alert.....................................................202 Drivebelt Routing................................................321 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION..........................202 USING DRIVER ALERT....................................202 Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™..................................................321 Driver and Passenger Airbags...................40 Drivebelt Routing...............................................322 Children and Airbags..........................................40 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment.......................................................40 Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................322 Drivebelt Routing...............................................322 Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........44 Driving Aids....................................................202 517 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index F Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................323 Drivebelt Routing...............................................323 Fastening the Seatbelts................................31 Entertainment...............................................419 Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.....................................33 Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................32 Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy.................31 AM/FM Radio......................................................420 Apps.......................................................................428 Bluetooth Stereo or USB.................................427 CD (If equipped)................................................426 HD Radio™ Information (If Available).........................................................423 SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated).......................................................420 Sources..................................................................419 Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information................................428 USB Port...............................................................428 Flat Tire Inflation See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................286 Floor Mats.......................................................229 Fog Lamps - Front See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................78 Ford Credit..........................................................11 US Only......................................................................11 Front Fog Lamps............................................78 Front Parking Aid..........................................182 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................183 Environment......................................................15 EPB Front Passenger Sensing System.............41 Fuel and Refueling.......................................153 Fuel Consumption.......................................159 See: Electric Parking Brake..............................174 Essential Towing Checks..........................224 Calculating Fuel Economy..............................160 Filling the Tank....................................................160 Before Towing a Trailer....................................225 Hitches...................................................................224 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)........................................225 Safety Chains......................................................224 Trailer Brakes.......................................................224 Trailer Lamps.......................................................224 When Towing a Trailer......................................225 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154 Fuel Quality....................................................154 Choosing the Right Fuel...................................154 Fuel Shutoff...................................................232 Fuses................................................................245 Fuse Specification Chart..........................245 Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........251 Power Distribution Box....................................245 Event Data Recording See: Data Recording..............................................9 G Export Unique Options..................................13 Extended Service Plan (ESP).................475 EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA ONLY)................................................................476 Ford Protect (U.S. Only)..................................475 Garage Door Opener See: Universal Garage Door Opener............137 Gauges...............................................................86 Exterior Mirrors................................................82 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............87 Fuel Gauge..............................................................87 Information Display.............................................86 Left Information Display...................................88 Type 1 and 2............................................................86 Type 3.......................................................................88 Auto-Dimming Feature......................................82 Blind Spot Monitor..............................................83 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................82 Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................82 Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors..........................83 Memory Mirrors.....................................................82 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................82 Puddle Lamps ......................................................83 Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................83 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................48 Intelligent Access.................................................48 General Maintenance Information........477 Multi-Point Inspection.....................................479 Owner Checks and Services..........................478 Protecting Your Investment............................477 518 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index I Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................477 Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?......................................................477 In California (U.S. Only)............................239 Information Display Control.......................70 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada..........................................................241 Getting the Services You Need...............238 Information Display Control Features..........70 Information Displays.....................................93 Away From Home..............................................238 General Information............................................93 Global Opening and Closing......................82 Information Messages................................102 Closing the Windows..........................................82 Opening the Windows........................................82 Active Park............................................................102 Adaptive Cruise Control...................................103 AdvanceTrac®.....................................................103 Airbag.....................................................................104 Alarm......................................................................104 All-Wheel Drive...................................................106 Automatic Engine Shutdown........................106 Auto Start-Stop..................................................104 Battery and Charging System........................107 Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System....................................................107 Doors and Locks.................................................108 Driver Alert............................................................108 Fuel..........................................................................108 Hill Start Assist...................................................108 Keys and Intelligent Access............................109 Lane Keeping System........................................110 Maintenance.........................................................110 MyKey........................................................................111 Park Aid....................................................................112 Park Brake...............................................................112 Power Steering.....................................................113 Pre-Collision Assist.............................................113 Remote Start.........................................................113 Seats.........................................................................114 Starting System ...................................................114 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................114 Traction Control...................................................115 Transmission.........................................................115 H Hazard Warning Flashers..........................232 Headlamp Adjusting See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................271 Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................75 Headlamp Removal See: Removing a Headlamp..........................273 Head Restraints.............................................127 Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................128 Tilting Head Restraints ....................................128 Heated Seats..................................................134 Heated Steering Wheel................................70 Heated Windows and Mirrors..................125 Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................125 Heated Rear Window........................................125 Heating See: Climate Control...........................................117 Hill Start Assist..............................................176 Switching the System On and Off................177 Using Hill Start Assist........................................176 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate...........................................................122 Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................124 General Hints........................................................122 Heating the Interior Quickly............................123 Recommended Settings for Cooling...........124 Recommended Settings for Heating...........123 Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather.............................................................124 Installing Child Restraints.............................17 Child Seats...............................................................17 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................18 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)............................................22 Using Tether Straps.............................................24 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes.............................................................173 Home Screen..................................................411 Hood Lock Instrument Cluster........................................86 Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................75 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........256 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps......................75 Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps...............75 519 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Interior Lamps.................................................78 Power Door Locks................................................58 Remote Control....................................................58 Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys......................................................................60 Front Interior Lamp..............................................78 Rear Interior Lamp..............................................80 Interior Luggage Compartment Release............................................................63 Interior Mirror...................................................84 Locks...................................................................58 Lug Nuts Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................84 See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................312 Introduction.........................................................7 M J Maintenance.................................................256 Jump Starting the Vehicle........................233 General Information.........................................256 Connecting the Jumper Cables....................233 Jump Starting......................................................234 Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................233 Removing the Jumper Cables.......................234 Manual Climate Control..............................117 Manual Seats.................................................129 Media Hub......................................................359 Memory Function...........................................131 Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................133 Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob.......................................................................132 Saving a PreSet Position..................................132 K Keyless Entry.....................................................61 SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad.........61 Keyless Starting............................................146 Message Center Ignition Modes.....................................................146 See: Information Displays.................................93 Keys and Remote Controls........................48 Mirrors See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............125 See: Windows and Mirrors.................................81 L Mobile Communications Equipment.......13 Moonroof..........................................................84 Lane Keeping System................................203 Switching the System On and Off..............204 Bounce-Back.........................................................85 Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............85 Venting the Moonroof........................................85 Lighting Control...............................................73 Headlamp Flasher................................................74 High Beams.............................................................73 Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™.................................................323 Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™.................................................325 Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L..............................326 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™..................................................327 MyKey Troubleshooting................................57 MyKey™.............................................................54 Lighting...............................................................73 General Information............................................73 Load Carrying..................................................217 Load Limit........................................................217 Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles..............................................................221 Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer..................................................................217 Principle of Operation........................................54 Locking and Unlocking.................................58 N Activating Intelligent Access............................59 Autolock..................................................................60 Autounlock..............................................................61 Battery Saver..........................................................61 Illuminated Entry...................................................61 Illuminated Exit......................................................61 Navigation.......................................................437 cityseeker.............................................................444 Destination Mode..............................................439 Map Mode.............................................................437 520 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Power Lumbar.......................................................131 Navigation Map Updates................................445 Navigation Menu................................................442 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................445 Waypoints............................................................443 Power Windows...............................................81 Accessory Delay.....................................................81 Bounce-Back..........................................................81 One-Touch Down..................................................81 One-Touch Up........................................................81 Window Lock..........................................................81 Normal Scheduled Maintenance.........480 Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor............................480 Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................481 Pre-Collision Assist......................................213 O Using the Pre-Collision Assist System...............................................................214 Protecting the Environment........................15 Oil Change Indicator Reset......................262 Oil Check R See: Engine Oil Check.......................................261 Opening and Closing the Hood..............256 Closing the Hood................................................257 Opening the Hood.............................................256 Rear Parking Aid.............................................181 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature......................................................242 Rear Seat Armrest........................................136 Rear Seats.......................................................133 Rear View Camera.......................................190 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................182 Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........243 Overhead Console........................................145 Camera Guidelines.............................................192 Manual Zoom.......................................................193 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................193 Rear Camera Delay............................................193 Using the Rear View Camera System..........191 P Parking Aids.....................................................181 Rear View Camera Principle of Operation........................................181 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................65 See: Rear View Camera...................................190 SecuriLock®...........................................................65 Recommended Towing Weights............223 Refueling..........................................................157 Remote Control..............................................48 PATS See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65 Perchlorate.........................................................11 Personal Safety System™..........................38 Car Finder.................................................................51 Intelligent Access Key........................................48 Remote Start..........................................................51 Replacing the Battery.........................................50 Sounding the Panic Alarm.................................51 Using the Key Blade............................................49 How Does the Personal Safety System Work?..................................................................38 Phone................................................................431 During a Phone Call..........................................435 Making Calls........................................................434 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time....................................................................431 Phone Menu.........................................................432 Receiving Calls....................................................435 Smartphone Connectivity..............................436 Text Messaging...................................................436 Remote Start..................................................125 Automatic Settings............................................126 Removing a Headlamp..............................273 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............283 Replacement Parts Recommendation........................................12 Collision Repairs....................................................12 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs..................................................................12 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12 Post-Crash Alert System..........................235 Power Door Locks See: Locking and Unlocking.............................58 Power Seats....................................................129 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control.............................................................53 10-way power seat..............................................131 6-way power seat..............................................130 521 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)..............................................................243 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)..............................................................243 Roadside Assistance...................................231 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance........................................................231 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage.................232 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance........................................................232 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance....................................231 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance....................................231 Ambient Lighting...............................................458 Bluetooth.............................................................450 Clock......................................................................449 Display...................................................................459 General..................................................................457 Media Player.......................................................448 Mobile Apps........................................................456 Navigation............................................................454 Phone....................................................................450 Radio......................................................................453 Sound....................................................................448 Valet Mode..........................................................460 Vehicle...................................................................458 Voice Control......................................................460 Wi-Fi.......................................................................458 Roadside Emergencies...............................231 Running-In Side Airbags.....................................................43 Side Sensing System..................................183 See: Breaking-In.................................................228 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................184 Running Out of Fuel....................................156 Sitting in the Correct Position...................127 Snow Chains Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container...........................................................157 Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................157 See: Using Snow Chains.................................308 Special Notices................................................12 New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12 On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector............................................................13 Special Instructions..............................................12 S Safety Canopy™............................................44 Safety Precautions.......................................153 Satellite Radio..............................................356 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance..............................................483 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN).................................................................357 Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............357 SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................357 Troubleshooting.................................................358 Exceptions...........................................................485 Speed Control See: Cruise Control............................................194 Spinout Detection.......................................235 Stability Control............................................179 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........485 Scheduled Maintenance...........................477 Seatbelt Extension.........................................37 Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................34 Seatbelt Reminder.........................................35 Principle of Operation.......................................179 Starting a Gasoline Engine........................147 Automatic Engine Shutdown........................148 Failure to Start......................................................147 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................149 Important Ventilating Information...............149 Starting Your Vehicle.........................................147 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving...............................................................148 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary.........................................................148 Belt-Minder™........................................................35 Seatbelts...........................................................30 Principle of Operation........................................30 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime...............................................................35 Conditions of operation.....................................35 Seats..................................................................127 Security..............................................................65 Settings...........................................................448 Starting and Stopping the Engine.........146 911 Assist...............................................................453 Electric Power Steering.....................................212 General Information..........................................146 Steering.............................................................212 522 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Steering Wheel................................................67 Storage Compartments.............................144 Sunroof Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure...........................................................290 Tips for Use of the Kit.......................................287 What to do after the Tire has been Sealed...............................................................290 What to do when a Tire Is Punctured........288 See: Moonroof.......................................................84 Sun Visors.........................................................84 Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................84 Tires Supplementary Restraints System.........39 Principle of Operation........................................39 See: Wheels and Tires.....................................286 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 SYNC™ 3........................................................398 Towing a Trailer.............................................222 General Information.........................................398 Towing Points................................................236 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................460 SYNC™ Applications and Services........................................................376 Installing the Recovery Hook........................236 Recovery Hook Location.................................236 Load Placement.................................................222 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........................................................226 911 Assist...............................................................376 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................378 Emergency Towing............................................226 Recreational Towing.........................................226 Vehicles Equipped with 1.5L, 2.0L, and 2.5L Engines.............................................................226 Vehicles Equipped with a 2.7L Engine................................................................226 SYNC™...........................................................360 General Information.........................................360 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................390 T Towing..............................................................222 Traction Control.............................................178 Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications.............321 Principle of Operation.......................................178 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only)......................240 Tire Care..........................................................292 Transmission Code Designation............329 Transmission..................................................163 Transmission Glossary of Tire Terminology........................294 Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading.............................................................292 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall...........................................................295 Temperature A B C............................................294 Traction AA A B C...............................................293 Treadwear.............................................................293 See: Transmission..............................................163 Transporting the Vehicle...........................236 Type Approvals..............................................512 RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)...................................512 U Tire Inflation When Punctured Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoost™..................................................257 Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost™.................................................258 Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................259 Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™................................................260 Unique Driving Characteristics.................151 Universal Garage Door Opener................137 See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................286 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........309 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System........................................310 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System .......................................310 Tire Repair Kit See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................286 Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................286 HomeLink Wireless Control System............137 First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air.......................................288 General Information..........................................287 USB Port.........................................................359 Using Adaptive Cruise Control................195 Automatic Cancellation...................................199 523 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index Making Calls.........................................................367 Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............364 Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................365 Phone Options during an Active Call.........368 Phone Voice Commands...............................366 Receiving Calls...................................................368 System Settings.................................................374 Text Messaging...................................................370 Blocked Sensor..................................................200 Canceling the Set Speed.................................199 Changing the Set Speed.................................198 Detection Issues.................................................199 Following a Vehicle............................................197 Following a Vehicle to a Complete Stop.....................................................................197 Hilly Condition Usage.......................................199 Overriding the System......................................198 Park Brake Application.....................................199 Resuming the Set Speed.................................199 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............196 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When Your Vehicle is Stationary...........................196 Setting the Gap Distance.................................197 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off.......................................................................199 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On........................................................................196 Switching to Normal Cruise Control............201 System Not Available......................................200 Using Traction Control................................178 Switching the System Off................................178 System Indicator Lights and Messages..........................................................178 Using a Switch.....................................................178 Using the Information Display Controls.............................................................178 Using Voice Recognition...........................362 Audio Voice Commands..................................413 Climate Voice Commands..............................414 Initiating a Voice Session................................362 Mobile App Voice Commands.......................416 Navigation Voice Commands........................415 Phone Voice Commands.................................414 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands.......................................................417 System Interaction and Feedback..............363 Voice Settings Commands..............................417 Using All-Wheel Drive................................168 Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................168 Using Cruise Control...................................194 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................195 Switching Cruise Control On..........................194 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only).........................241 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems...........................................................57 Using Snow Chains....................................308 Using Stability Control...............................180 Using Summer Tires..................................308 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player.............................................................381 V Vehicle Care...................................................279 General Information..........................................279 Vehicle Certification Label.......................328 Vehicle Identification Number................327 Vehicle Storage............................................284 Accessing Your USB Song Library...............385 Bluetooth Devices and System Settings.............................................................387 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port...........................................................381 Media Menu Features......................................385 Media Voice Commands.................................382 USB 2......................................................................387 Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........388 Battery...................................................................285 Body.......................................................................284 Brakes....................................................................285 Cooling system...................................................285 Engine....................................................................284 Fuel system..........................................................285 General..................................................................284 Miscellaneous.....................................................285 Removing Vehicle From Storage.................285 Tires........................................................................285 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............364 Accessing Features through the Phone Menu.................................................................369 Accessing Your Phone Settings....................372 Bluetooth Devices..............................................373 Ventilation See: Climate Control...........................................117 524 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing Index VIN Windows and Mirrors.....................................81 Windshield Washers......................................72 Windshield Wipers..........................................71 See: Vehicle Identification Number.............327 Voice Control...................................................69 Intermittent Wipe..................................................71 Speed Dependent Wipers..................................71 W Wiper Blades Warning Lamps and Indicators................89 See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................270 Adaptive Cruise Control....................................89 Anti-Lock Braking System................................89 Auto Start-stop....................................................89 Battery.....................................................................89 Blind Spot Monitor..............................................89 Brake System........................................................89 Cruise Control.......................................................89 Direction Indicator...............................................90 Door Ajar.................................................................90 Electric Park Brake..............................................90 Engine Coolant Temperature..........................90 Engine Oil................................................................90 Fasten Seatbelt....................................................90 Front Airbag...........................................................90 Front Fog Lamps..................................................90 Grade Assist...........................................................90 Heads Up Display................................................90 High Beam..............................................................90 Hood Ajar................................................................90 Lane Keeping Aid.................................................90 Low Fuel Level........................................................91 Low Tire Pressure Warning................................91 Parking Lamps.......................................................91 Powertrain Fault....................................................91 Service Engine Soon............................................91 Sport Mode..............................................................91 Stability Control.....................................................91 Stability Control Off............................................92 Trunk Ajar................................................................92 Wipers and Washers......................................71 Washer Fluid Check....................................269 Washers See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................279 See: Wipers and Washers...................................71 Waxing............................................................280 Wheel Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................312 Wheels and Tires.........................................286 Technical Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™/ 2.0L EcoBoost™/2.5L.................................318 Technical Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™......................................................319 525 Fusion (CC7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing